MC2J 19A321 AA
2021 E-SERIES Owner’s Manual
ford.caowner.ford.com
2021 E-SERIES Owner’s Manual
December 2019
First Printing
Litho in U.S.A.
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2019
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 201910 20191023173703
California Proposition 65
WARNING: Operating, servicing and
maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize
exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle
in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle.
For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and
related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash your hands after handling.
Introduction
About This Manual ..........................................5
Symbols Glossary ............................................5
Data Recording ..................................................7
Perchlorate ........................................................11
Ford Credit ........................................................12
Replacement Parts Recommendation
............................................................................12
Special Notices ...............................................12
Mobile Communications Equipment
...........................................................................14
Environment
Protecting the Environment .......................15
At a Glance
Instrument Panel ...........................................16
Child Safety
General Information ......................................17
Installing Child Restraints ...........................19
Booster Seats .................................................23
Child Restraint Positioning ........................25
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation ..................................27
Fastening the Seatbelts .............................28
Seatbelt Height Adjustment ....................30
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime ............................................................30
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance ................................................31
Seatbelt Extensions ......................................31
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation ..................................32
Driver and Passenger Airbags ...................33
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator .......37
Airbag Disposal ..............................................38
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies .................................................39
Remote Control .............................................39
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
...........................................................................41
Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking ................................42
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System ........................45
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel ...................47
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Cruise Control .............................................47
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Cruise
Control ..........................................................48
Information Display Control .....................48
Horn ...................................................................48
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers .......................................49
Windshield Washers ....................................49
Lighting
General Information ....................................50
Lighting Control .............................................50
Autolamps ........................................................51
Instrument Lighting Dimmer .....................51
Daytime Running Lamps .............................51
Direction Indicators .......................................52
Automatic High Beam Control
What Is Automatic High Beam Control
...........................................................................53
Switching Automatic High Beam Control
On and Off ...................................................53
1
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Automatic High Beam Control Indicators
...........................................................................53
Overriding Automatic High Beam Control
..........................................................................54
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows .............................................55
Exterior Mirrors ...............................................55
Interior Mirror ..................................................56
Sun Visors ........................................................56
Instrument Cluster
Gauges ...............................................................57
Warning Lamps and Indicators ...............60
Audible Warnings and Indicators ............62
Information Displays
General Information .....................................63
Information Messages ................................66
Climate Control
Manual Climate Control .............................70
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
............................................................................71
Rear Passenger Climate Controls ............72
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position ...................73
Head Restraints ..............................................73
Manual Seats ..................................................74
Power Seats .....................................................75
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points .................................76
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information .....................................78
Ignition Switch ................................................78
Starting a Gasoline Engine ........................78
Engine Block Heater ....................................80
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions .......................................82
Fuel Quality - E85 .........................................82
Fuel Quality - Gasoline ...............................84
Running Out of Fuel .....................................84
Refueling ..........................................................85
Fuel Consumption ........................................86
Engine Emission Control
Emission Law .................................................88
Catalytic Converter ......................................89
Transmission
Automatic Transmission ............................92
Rear Axle
Limited Slip Differential .............................96
Brakes
General Information .....................................97
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
...........................................................................97
Parking Brake .................................................98
Hill Start Assist ..............................................98
Traction Control
Principle of Operation ...............................100
Using Traction Control ..............................100
Parking Aids
Rear View Camera .......................................101
Cruise Control
What Is Cruise Control ..............................103
Switching Cruise Control On and Off
.........................................................................103
Setting the Cruise Control Speed .........103
Canceling the Set Speed ..........................103
2
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Resuming the Set Speed .........................104
Cruise Control Indicators ..........................104
Using Adaptive Cruise Control ...............104
Driving Aids
Driver Alert ........................................................111
Lane Keeping System ..................................112
Steering ............................................................115
Pre-Collision Assist ......................................116
Load Carrying
Load Limit ......................................................120
Towing
Towing a Trailer .............................................125
Recommended Towing Weights ...........126
Essential Towing Checks ..........................130
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels ......136
Driving Hints
Breaking-In .....................................................137
Reduced Engine Performance ................137
Economical Driving ......................................137
Driving Through Water ...............................138
Floor Mats ......................................................138
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance .................................140
Hazard Flashers ............................................141
Fuel Shutoff ....................................................141
Jump Starting the Vehicle ........................142
Transporting the Vehicle ...........................143
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need ...............145
In California (U.S. Only) ............................146
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only) ......................147
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada ........................................................148
Ordering Additional Owner's Literature
.........................................................................149
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)
.........................................................................149
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)
.........................................................................150
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart ...........................151
Changing a Fuse ..........................................159
Maintenance
General Information ....................................161
Opening and Closing the Hood ...............161
Under Hood Overview ...............................162
Engine Oil Dipstick ......................................163
Engine Oil Check ..........................................163
Oil Change Indicator Reset ......................164
Engine Coolant Check ...............................165
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check
........................................................................169
Brake Fluid Check ..........................................171
Power Steering Fluid Check .....................172
Washer Fluid Check .....................................173
Fuel Filter .........................................................173
Changing the 12V Battery ..........................173
Checking the Wiper Blades ......................174
Changing the Wiper Blades .....................175
Adjusting the Headlamps .........................175
Removing a Headlamp ..............................176
Changing a Bulb ............................................177
Changing the Engine Air Filter .................178
Vehicle Care
General Information ...................................180
Cleaning Products ......................................180
Cleaning the Exterior .................................180
Waxing .............................................................182
Cleaning the Engine ....................................182
3
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades
.........................................................................182
Cleaning the Interior ...................................183
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens .......................183
Cleaning Leather Seats .............................184
Repairing Minor Paint Damage ..............185
Cleaning the Wheels ..................................185
Vehicle Storage ............................................185
Wheels and Tires
General Information ...................................188
Tire Care ..........................................................189
Using Snow Chains ....................................207
Tire Pressure Monitoring System .........208
Changing a Road Wheel ............................213
Technical Specifications ...........................217
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications ................................219
Motorcraft Parts ...........................................219
Vehicle Identification Number ................221
Transmission Code Designation ............222
Capacities and Specifications ...............223
Bulb Specification Chart ..........................232
Connected Vehicle
Connected Vehicle Requirements ........234
Connected Vehicle Limitations .............234
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network ......................................................234
Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting
........................................................................234
Audio System
General Information ..................................235
Audio Unit ......................................................235
Digital Radio .................................................238
Connecting a Bluetooth Device ............240
Satellite Radio ..............................................241
Streaming Bluetooth Audio ....................243
Playing Media From a USB Device .......243
USB Port ........................................................244
Using Voice Recognition ..........................244
Accessories
Accessories ...................................................245
Auxiliary Switches ......................................246
Ford Protect
Ford Protect ..................................................248
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information ......250
Normal Scheduled Maintenance ..........253
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance ............................................255
Scheduled Maintenance Record ...........257
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility .............267
End User License Agreement ................269
4
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Table of Contents
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING: Driving while
distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly
recommend that you use extreme
caution when using any device that may
take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the
vehicle you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so may appear different
to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand side.A
Left-hand side.B
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
E162384
Air conditioning system
E231157
Air conditioning system lubricant
type
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
Brake system
5
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Introduction
E270480
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
E71880
Fasten seatbelt
E231160
Flammable
E67017
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard flashers
Heated rear window
Windshield defrosting system
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
6
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Introduction
E270945
Horn control
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
E231159
Requires registered technician
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E231158
See Service Manual
Service engine soon
E270849
Passenger airbag activated
E270850
Passenger airbag deactivated
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
E163957
Hill descent control
E272858
Trail control
E270969
Windshield wiping system
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
WARNING: Do not connect
wireless plug-in devices to the data link
connector. Unauthorized third parties
could gain access to vehicle data and
impair the performance of safety related
systems. Only allow repair facilities that
follow our service and repair instructions
to connect their equipment to the data
link connector.
We respect your privacy and are
committed to protecting it. The
information contained in this publication
was correct at the time of going to print,
but as technology rapidly changes, we
recommend that you visit the regional Ford
website for the latest information.
7
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Introduction
Your vehicle has electronic control units
that have data recording functionality and
the ability to permanently or temporarily
store data. This data could include
information on the condition and status of
your vehicle, vehicle maintenance
requirements, events and malfunctions.
The types of data that can be recorded are
described in this section. Some of the data
recorded is stored in event logs or error
logs.
Note: Error logs are reset following a service
or repair.
Note: We may provide information in
response to requests from law enforcement,
other government authorities and third
parties acting with lawful authority or
through a legal process. Such information
could be used by them in legal proceedings.
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Operating states of system
components, for example, fuel level,
tire pressure and battery charge level.
• Vehicle and component status, for
example, wheel speed, deceleration,
lateral acceleration and seatbelt
status.
• Events or errors in essential systems,
for example, headlamps and brakes.
• System responses to driving situations,
for example, airbag deployment and
stability control.
• Environmental conditions, for example,
temperature.
Some of this data, when used in
combination with other information, for
example, an accident report, damage to a
vehicle or eyewitness statements, could
be associated with a specific person.
Service Data
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company
(Ford of Canada in Canada), and service
and repair facilities may access or share
among them vehicle diagnostic
information received through a direct
connection to your vehicle when
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford
of Canada, in Canada) may, where
permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic
information for vehicle improvement or
with other information we may have about
you, for example, your contact information,
to offer you products or services that may
interest you. Data may be provided to our
service providers such as part suppliers
that may help diagnose malfunctions, and
who are similarly obligated to protect data.
We retain this data only as long as
necessary to perform these functions or to
comply with law. We may provide
information where required in response to
official requests to law enforcement or
other government authorities or third
parties acting with lawful authority or court
order, and such information may be used
in legal proceedings. For U.S. only (if
equipped), if you choose to use connected
apps and services, you consent that certain
diagnostic information may also be
accessed electronically by Ford Motor
Company and Ford authorized service
facilities, and that the diagnostic
information may be used to provide
services to you, personalizing your
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you
products and services that may interest
8
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Introduction
you, where permitted by law. For Canada
only, for more information, please review
the Ford of Canada privacy policy at
www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data
storage and use of service providers in
other jurisdictions who may be subject to
legal requirements in Canada, the United
States and other countries applicable to
them, for example, lawful requirements to
disclose personal information to
governmental authorities in those
countries.
Event Data
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder. The main purpose of an event
data recorder is to record, in certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an
airbag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle; this data assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
event data recorder is designed to record
data related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger seatbelts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the
event data recorder under normal driving
conditions and no personal data or
information (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data with
the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have such special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder.
Comfort, Convenience and
Entertainment Data
Your vehicle has electronic control units
that have the ability to store data based
on your personalized settings. The data is
stored locally in the vehicle or on devices
that you connect to it, for example, a USB
drive or digital music player. You can delete
some of this data and also choose whether
to share it through the services to which
you subscribe.
Comfort and Convenience Data
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Seat and steering wheel position.
• Climate control settings.
• Radio presets.
9
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Introduction
Entertainment Data
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Music, videos or album art.
• Contacts and corresponding address
book entries.
• Navigation destinations.
Services That We Provide
If you use our services, we collect and use
data, for example, account information,
vehicle location and driving characteristics,
that could identify you. We transmit this
data through a dedicated, protected
connection. We only collect and use data
to enable your use of our services to which
you have subscribed, with your consent or
where permitted by law. For additional
information, see the terms and conditions
of the services to which you have
subscribed.
Services That Third Parties
Provide
We recommend that you review the terms
and conditions and data privacy
information for any services to which you
subscribe. We take no responsibility for
services that third parties provide.
Vehicles With a Connectivity
Device (If Equipped)
E314755
The connectivity device has a
SIM. The connectivity device was
enabled when your vehicle was
built and periodically sends messages to
stay connected to the cell phone network.
These messages could include information
that identifies your vehicle, the SIM and the
electronic serial number of the connectivity
device. Cell phone network service
providers could have access to additional
information, for example, cell phone
network tower identification.
Note: The connectivity device continues to
send this information unless you disable the
connectivity device. To find out more about
having the connectivity device disabled,
contact the Ford Customer Relationship
Center. Disabling this connectivity device is
permanent. See Connected Vehicle (page
234).
If FordPass is connected to your vehicle,
Ford also receives additional information,
for example, location and vehicle data. See
FordPass Terms and Privacy Policy. For
additional information about our privacy
policy, visit www.FordConnected.com or
refer to your local Ford website.
Note: To stop the connectivity device from
sharing this information, for example,
location and vehicle data, see your
Connectivity Settings through the FordPass
app. You may also remove the vehicle from
your FordPass account.
Note: The service can be unavailable or
interrupted for a number of reasons, for
example, environmental or topographical
conditions and data plan coverage.
Note: To find out if your vehicle has a
connectivity technology, visit
www.FordConnected.com.
Note: If you plan to no longer use your
vehicle, for example, by selling or donating
it, remember to remove the vehicle from
your FordPass account. If you recently
purchased the vehicle and want to disable
connectivity, please contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center through the
FordPass app or by using the e-mail address
on the local Ford website.
10
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Introduction
Vehicles With SYNC
Mobile Device Data
If you connect a mobile device to your
vehicle, you can display data from your
device on the touchscreen for example,
music and album art. You can share your
vehicle data with mobile apps on your
device through the system.
The mobile apps function operates by your
connected device sending data to us in the
United States. The data is encrypted and
includes the vehicle identification number
of your vehicle, the SYNC module serial
number, odometer, enabled apps, usage
statistics and debugging information. We
retain it only as long as necessary to
provide the service, to troubleshoot, for
continuous improvement and to offer you
products and services that may be of
interest to you according to your
preferences and where allowed by law.
If you connect a cell phone to the system,
the system creates a profile that links to
that cell phone. The cell phone profile
enables more mobile features and efficient
operation. The profile contains, for
example, data from your phonebook, read
and unread text messages and call history,
including history of calls when your cell
phone was not connected to the system.
If you connect a media device, the system
creates and retains a media device index
of supported media content. The system
also records a short diagnostic log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity.
The cell phone profile, media device index
and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
accessible only in your vehicle when you
connect your cell phone or media device.
If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you use the
master reset function to erase the stored
information.
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to your
vehicle's module.
For additional information about our
privacy policy, refer to your local Ford
website.
Note: To find out if your vehicle has a
connectivity technology, visit
www.FordConnected.com.
Vehicles With an Emergency Call
System
When the emergency call system is active,
it may disclose to emergency services that
your vehicle has been in a crash involving
the deployment of an airbag or activation
of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions
or updates to the emergency call system
may also be capable of electronically or
verbally disclosing to emergency services
operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
emergency services operators to provide
the most appropriate emergency services.
If you do not want to disclose this
information, do not activate the emergency
call system.
Note: You cannot deactivate emergency
call systems that are required by law.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners
and remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling
may apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
11
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Introduction
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
FORD CREDIT
US Only
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
For assistance call 1-800-727-7000, or for
more information about Ford Credit and
access to the online Account Manager tool,
visit www.ford.com/finance.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts
meet our stringent requirements for fit,
finish, structural integrity, corrosion
protection and dent resistance. During
vehicle development we validate that
these parts deliver the intended level of
protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level
of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford
Warranty may not cover damage caused
to your vehicle as a result of failed
non-Ford parts. For additional information,
refer to the terms and conditions of the
Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is
covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, see your warranty guide that is
available online. For more information,
refer to our website and download your
copy of the warranty guide.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
12
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Introduction
WARNING: You risk death or
serious injury to yourself and others if you
do not follow the instruction highlighted
by the warning symbol. Failure to follow
the specific warnings and instructions
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Never place front seat
mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
in front of an active passenger airbag.
Fleet Telematics Modem (If Equipped)
The onboard modem provides access to
data to support telematics services such
as location, speed, idle time, fuel, vehicle
diagnostics and maintenance alerts. To
explore data, telematics services, third
party service provider support and to
manage existing telematics accounts, refer
to www.commericalsolutions.ford.com or
call 833-FCS-FORD.
Note: This is not available with FordPass
Connect.
FordPass Connect (If Equipped)
With a FordPass Connect-equipped
vehicle, you can use FordPass to track your
vehicle’s location and remotely access
vehicle features such as start, lock and
unlock and vehicle status including fuel
level and approximate mileage. Message
and data rates may apply. Services may
be limited by mobile phone network
coverage area. For additional information,
refer to www.fordpass.com.
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector
WARNING: Do not connect
wireless plug-in devices to the data link
connector. Unauthorized third parties
could gain access to vehicle data and
impair the performance of safety related
systems. Only allow repair facilities that
follow our service and repair instructions
to connect their equipment to the data
link connector.
Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link
Connector (DLC) that is used in
conjunction with a diagnostic scan tool for
vehicle diagnostics, repairs and
reprogramming services. Installing an
aftermarket device that uses the DLC
during normal driving for purposes such as
remote insurance company monitoring,
transmission of vehicle data to other
devices or entities, or altering the
performance of the vehicle, may cause
interference with or even damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of aftermarket plug-in
devices unless approved by Ford. The
vehicle Warranty will not cover damage
caused by an aftermarket plug-in device.
Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks
and Utility Type Vehicles
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read
this Owner’s Manual carefully. Your vehicle
is not a passenger car. As with other
vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury or death.
13
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Introduction
Using your Vehicle as an
Ambulance
If your light truck has the Ford Ambulance
Preparation Package, it may be utilized as
an ambulance. Ford urges ambulance
manufacturers to follow the
recommendations of the Ford Incomplete
Vehicle Manual, Ford Truck Body Builder’s
Layout Book and the Qualified Vehicle
Modifiers (QVM) Guidelines as well as
pertinent supplements. For additional
information, please contact the Truck Body
Builders Advisory Service at
http://www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas/
and then by selecting Contact Us or by
phone at 1–877–840–4338.
Use of your Ford light truck as an
ambulance, without the Ford Ambulance
Preparation Package voids the Ford New
Vehicle Limited Warranty and may void
the emissions warranties. In addition,
ambulance usage without the preparation
package could cause high underbody
temperatures, over-pressurized fuel and a
risk of spraying fuel, which could lead to
fires.
If your vehicle has the Ford Ambulance
Preparation Package, it will be indicated
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The label is on the driver side door
pillar or on the rear edge of the driver door.
You can determine whether the
ambulance manufacturer followed Ford’s
recommendations by directly contacting
that manufacturer.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING: Driving while
distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly
recommend that you use extreme
caution when using any device that may
take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
14
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Introduction
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You should play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
For additional information about our
sustainability progress and initiatives, visit
www.sustainability.ford.com.
15
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Environment
INSTRUMENT PANEL
E307562
Direction indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 52). Wiper lever. See
Windshield Wipers (page 49).
A
Information display control. See Information Display Control (page 48).B
Instrument cluster. See General Information (page 63).C
Gearshift lever. See Automatic Transmission (page 92).D
Auxiliary switches. See Auxiliary Switches (page 246).E
Audio unit. See Audio Unit (page 235).F
Passenger airbag deactivation indicator. See Driver and Passenger Airbags
(page 33).
G
Hazard flasher switch. See Hazard Flashers (page 141).H
Climate control. See Manual Climate Control (page 70).I
Ignition. See Ignition Switch (page 78).J
Horn.K
Steering wheel adjustment. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page 47).L
Cruise control. See Cruise Control (page 103).M
Lighting control. See Lighting Control (page 50).N
16
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
At a Glance
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNING: Always make sure your
child is secured properly in a device that
is appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped
differently. The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration and other safety
organizations, base their
recommendations for child restraints on
probable child height, age and weight
thresholds, or on the minimum
requirements of the law. We recommend
that you check with a NHTSA Certified
Child Passenger Safety Technician
(CPST) to make sure that you properly
install the child restraint in your vehicle
and that you consult your pediatrician to
make sure you have a child restraint
appropriate for your child. To locate a
child restraint fitting station and CPST,
contact NHTSA toll free at
1-888-327-4236 or go to
www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca
to find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your
area. Failure to properly restrain children
in child restraints made especially for
their height, age and weight, may result
in an increased risk of serious injury or
death to your child.
WARNING: On hot days, the
temperature inside the vehicle can rise
very quickly. Exposure of people or
animals to these high temperatures for
even a short time can cause death or
serious heat related injuries, including
brain damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.
17
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended Restraint
Type
Child Size, Height, Weight, or AgeChild
Use a child restraint
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Infants or
toddlers
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child restraint (generally
children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four and less
than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg)
and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle seatbelt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seat backrest
upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
57 in (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb
(36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended
by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
• You are required by law to properly use
child restraints for infants and toddlers
in the United States and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb
(36 kg). Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position.
• When installing a rear facing child
restraint, adjust the vehicle seats to
avoid interference between the child
restraint and the vehicle seat in front
of the child restraint.
18
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Child Safety
INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS
Child Seats
E142594
Use a child restraint (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat) for infants, toddlers, or children
weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally
age four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Properly secure
children 12 years old and under in a rear
seating position whenever possible. If
you are unable to properly secure all
children in a rear seating position,
properly secure the largest child on the
front seat. If you must use a forward
facing child restraint on the front seat,
move the seat as far back as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Depending on where
you secure a child restraint, and
depending on the child restraint design,
you may block access to certain seatbelt
buckle assemblies and LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features
potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, make sure occupants only use
seating positions where they are able to
be properly restrained.
When installing a child restraint with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the child
restraint, with the tongue between the
child restraint and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat in the upright
position before you install the child
restraint.
• Put the seatbelt in the automatic
locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle
does not require the use of a locking
clip.
Perform the following steps when
installing the child restraint with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child restraint
illustrated is a forward facing child restraint,
the steps are the same for installing a rear
facing child restraint.
19
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Child Safety
E142528
1. Position the child restraint in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E142529
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and
then grasp the shoulder belt and lap
belt together.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according
to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Make sure that you did not
twist the belt webbing.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until you pull all of the belt out.
20
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Child Safety
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to
indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode. You should
not be able to pull more belt out. If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that exists once you add the extra
weight of the child to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child restraint to your
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will help to remove
remaining slack from the belt.
9. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
attach it.
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place.
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side and
forward and back. There should be no
more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for
proper installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child restraints
include a tether strap which extends from
the back of the child restraint and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older child restraints.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
restraint for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your child
restraint does not reach the appropriate
top tether anchor in the vehicle.
Attach the tether strap only to the tether
anchor as shown. The tether strap may not
work properly if attached somewhere other
than the correct tether anchor.
21
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Child Safety
Note: Do not tighten the tether strap
enough to lift the child restraint off the
vehicle seat cushion when the child is
seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child restraint.
Keeping the child restraint just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
Perform the following steps to install a
child restraint with tether anchors:
E319169
You can attach the tether directly to the
rear of the front seat.
1. Adjust the front passenger seat fully
forward.
E190810
2. Route the child restraint tether strap
over the back of the front passenger
seat as shown.
E190811
3. Clip the tether strap hook to the seat
pedestal at the location shown. If the
tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the
child restraint may not be retained
properly in the event of a crash.
4. Adjust the front passenger seat to the
full rearward position.
5. Tighten the child restraint tether strap
according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
If you do not properly anchor the child
restraint, the risk of a child being injured in
a crash greatly increases.
22
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Child Safety
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child
to put the shoulder section of the
seatbelt under their arm or behind their
back. Failure to follow this instruction
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or
death in a crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety restraint
(generally children who are less than 57 in
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age 4 and
less than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg)
and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer). Many state and
provincial laws require that children use
approved booster seats until they reach
age eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or
80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat backrest with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
backrest or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat backrest
or head restraint and lap and shoulder
belts, or consider using a high back booster
seat.
23
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Child Safety
E70710
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
E142596
E142597
24
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Child Safety
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any item
thicker than this under the booster seat.
Check with the booster seat
manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD RESTRAINT
POSITIONING
WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Properly secure
children 12 years old and under in a rear
seating position whenever possible. If
you are unable to properly secure all
children in a rear seating position,
properly secure the largest child on the
front seat. If you must use a forward
facing child restraint on the front seat,
move the seat as far back as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Always carefully follow
the instructions and warnings provided
by the manufacturer of any child
restraint to determine if the restraint
device is appropriate for your child's size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions and
warnings provided for installation and
use in conjunction with the instructions
and warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the
child may increase the risk of serious
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow a
passenger to hold a child on their lap
when your vehicle is moving. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: Do not use pillows,
books or towels to boost your child's
height. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure child
restraints or booster seats when they are
not in use. They could become projectiles
in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child
to put the shoulder section of the
seatbelt under their arm or behind their
back. Failure to follow this instruction
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children
or pets unattended in your vehicle.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
25
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Attaching Child Restraints
Use Any Attachment Method as Indicated Below by X.
Restraint Type
Seatbelt Only
Seatbelt and Top
Tether Anchor
Combined Weight of
Child and Child
Restraint
XUp to 65 lb (29.5 kg)
Rear-facing
child restraint
XOver 65 lb (29.5 kg)
Rear-facing
child restraint
X
1
XUp to 65 lb (29.5 kg)
Forward-facing
child restraint
X
1
XOver 65 lb (29.5 kg)
Forward-facing
child restraint
1
We recommend using a top tether if the child restraint has one, and the child restraint
manufacturer recommends its use.
Note: The child restraint must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Head
Restraints (page 73).
26
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Always drive and ride
with the seat backrest upright and the
lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
injury, make sure children sit where they
can be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger
hold a child on his or her lap while your
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash
which may result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING: All occupants of the
vehicle, including the driver, should
always properly wear their safety belts,
even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided. Failure to
properly wear your safety belt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: It is extremely
dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt
properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a
safety belt.
WARNING: Each seating position
in your vehicle has a specific safety belt
assembly which is made up of one
buckle and one tongue that are designed
to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder
belt on the outside shoulder only. Never
wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2)
Never swing the safety belt around your
neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never
use a single belt for more than one
person.
WARNING: When possible, all
children 12 years old and under should
be properly restrained in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Safety belts and seats
can become hot in a vehicle that has
been closed up in sunny weather; they
could burn a small child. Check seat
covers and buckles before you place a
child anywhere near them.
WARNING: Front and rear seat
occupants, including pregnant women,
should wear safety belts for optimum
protection in an accident.
All seating positions in this vehicle have
lap and shoulder safety belts. All
occupants of the vehicle should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system
is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder safety belts.
• Shoulder safety belt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver safety
belt).
27
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Seatbelts
• Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
• Safety belt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
E71880
• Safety belt warning light and chime.
E67017
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
The safety belt pretensioners at the front
seating positions are designed to tighten
the safety belts when activated. In frontal
and near-frontal crashes, the safety belt
pretensioners may be activated alone or,
if the crash is of sufficient severity, together
with the front airbags.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
The front outboard safety restraints in the
vehicle are combination lap and shoulder
belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
WARNING: Always ride and drive
with your seatback upright and properly
fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion
of the seatbelt snugly and low across
the hips. Position the shoulder portion of
the seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant
women must follow this practice. See
the following figure.
E142590
28
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Seatbelts
Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt low
across the hips below the belly and worn
as tight as comfort allows. Position the
shoulder belt to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.
Seatbelt Locking Modes
WARNING: If your vehicle is
involved in a crash, have the seatbelts
and associated components inspected
as soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver seatbelt has the first type of locking
mode. The front outboard passenger
seatbelt has both types of locking modes
described as follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly
or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination
seatbelts lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if you pull the webbing out too quickly. If
the seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower
the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt
to retract. If the retractor does not unlock,
pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a
small length of webbing back toward the
stowed position. For rear seatbelts, recline
the rear seat backrest or push the seat
backrest cushion away from the seatbelt.
Feed a small length of webbing back
toward the stowed position.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt
automatically pre-locks. The belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder
belt. The automatic locking mode is not
available on the driver seatbelt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
Use this mode any time a child safety seat,
except a booster, is installed in the
passenger front seating position. See
Child Safety (page 17).
How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled
out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
29
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Seatbelts
How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
SEATBELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING: Position the safety belt
height adjuster so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
Failure to adjust the safety belt properly
could reduce the effectiveness of the
safety belt and increase the risk of injury
in a crash.
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so
the belt rests across the middle of your
shoulder.
E190812
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Press the button and slide the height
adjuster up or down.
2. Release the button and pull down on
the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
E71880
This lamp illuminates and an
indicator chime will sound if the
driver seatbelt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
Conditions of operation
ThenIf
The seatbelt warning lamp illuminates and
the indicator chime sounds for a few
seconds.
The driver seatbelt is not buckled before
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi-
tion...
The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator
chime turn off.
The driver seatbelt is buckled while the
warning lamp is illuminated and the indic-
ator chime is sounding...
The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator
chime remain off.
The driver seatbelt is buckled before the
ignition switch is turned to the on position...
30
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Seatbelts
CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle seatbelts and child
restraint systems periodically to make sure
they work properly and are not damaged.
Inspect the vehicle seatbelts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if
necessary. All vehicle seatbelt assemblies,
including retractors, buckles, front seatbelt
buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback
(if equipped), rear inflatable seatbelts (if
equipped), child restraint LATCH and
tether anchors, and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after a crash. Read
the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions for additional inspection and
maintenance information specific to the
child restraint.
We recommend that all seatbelt
assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a
crash be replaced. However, if the crash
was minor and an authorized dealer finds
that the belts do not show damage and
continue to operate properly, they do not
need to be replaced. Seatbelt assemblies
not in use during a crash should also be
inspected and replaced if either damage
or improper operation is noted.
Properly care for seatbelts. See Cleaning
the Interior (page 183).
SEATBELT EXTENSIONS
WARNING: Persons who fit into
the vehicle's seatbelt should not use an
extension. Unnecessary use could result
in serious personal injury in the event of
a crash.
WARNING: Only use extensions
provided free of charge by our dealers.
The dealer will provide an extension
designed specifically for this vehicle,
model year and seating position. The use
of an extension intended for another
vehicle, model year or seating position
may not offer you the full protection of
your vehicle's seatbelt restraint system.
WARNING: Never use seatbelt
extensions to install child restraints.
WARNING: Do not use a seatbelt
extension with an inflatable seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not use extensions
to change the way the seatbelt fits
across the torso, over the lap or to make
the seatbelt buckle easier to reach.
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from
our dealers. Only use our seatbelt
extensions made by the original equipment
seatbelt manufacturer with our seatbelts.
Ask your authorized dealer if your extension
is compatible with your vehicle restraint
system.
31
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Seatbelts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate
slowly or gently, and the risk of injury
from a deploying airbag is the greatest
close to the trim covering the airbag
module.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should
always properly wear their seatbelts,
even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided. Failure to
properly wear your seatbelt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Properly secure
children 12 years old and under in a rear
seating position whenever possible. If
you are unable to properly secure all
children in a rear seating position,
properly secure the largest child on the
front seat. If you must use a forward
facing child restraint on the front seat,
move the seat as far back as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the
steering wheel. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Several airbag system
components get hot after inflation. To
reduce the risk of injury, do not touch
them after inflation.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has
deployed, it will not function again. Have
the system and associated components
inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
seatbelts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (for example, baking soda)
that result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
32
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the
steering wheel. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 37).
Passenger Airbag On and Off
Switch (If Equipped)
WARNING: Your vehicle may have
an airbag deactivation switch. Before
driving, always look at the switch to
make sure it is in the appropriate
position. Failure to put the switch in the
proper position can increase the risk of
serious injury or death in a crash.
Note: The passenger airbag on and off
switch may be on vehicles with no rear
seats.
Switching the Passenger Airbag Off
WARNING: If the light does not
illuminate when the passenger airbag
switch is off and you switch the ignition
on, have the passenger airbag switch
serviced immediately by a qualified
technician.
WARNING: To avoid switching on
the airbag, always remove the ignition
key with the switch in the off position.
WARNING: NEVER use a rearward
facing child restraint on a seat protected
by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it,
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD
can occur.
33
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
E224283
1. Insert the ignition key into the
passenger airbag on and off switch,
turn the switch to off and hold it in off
while removing the key.
2. When you switch the ignition on and
the passenger airbag switch is in the
off position, the off light illuminates
briefly, momentarily shuts off and then
turns back on. This indicates that the
passenger airbag is deactivated.
Switching the Passenger Airbag Back
On
WARNING: The seatbelts for the
driver and right front passenger seating
positions are specifically designed to
operate together with the airbags in
certain types of crashes. When you
switch off your airbag, you not only lose
the protection of the airbag, you also
may reduce the effectiveness of your
seatbelt system. If the passenger does
not meet the requirements stated in the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration or Transport Canada
deactivation criteria, switching off the
airbag can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: If your vehicle has rear
seats, always transport children who are
12 and younger in the rear seat. Always
use seatbelts and child restraints
properly. Do not place a child in a rear
facing infant seat in the front seat unless
your vehicle is equipped with an airbag
on and off switch and the passenger
airbag is turned off. This is because the
back of the infant seat is too close to the
inflating airbag and the risk of a fatal
injury to the infant when the airbag
inflates is substantial.
WARNING: If the passenger airbag
off light is illuminated when the
passenger airbag switch is on and the
ignition is on, have the passenger airbag
switch serviced immediately by a
qualified technician.
The passenger airbag remains off until you
switch it back on.
E190814
1. Insert the ignition key into the
passenger airbag on and off switch and
turn the switch to on.
2. The off light briefly illuminates when
you switch the ignition on. This
indicates that the passenger airbag is
operational.
34
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The passenger side airbag should always
be on (the airbag off light should not be
illuminated) unless the passenger is a
person who meets the requirements stated
either in Category 1, 2 or 3 of the National
Highway Traffic Safety
Administration/Transport Canada
deactivation criteria which follows.
The vast majority of drivers and passengers
are much safer with an airbag than
without. To do their job and reduce the risk
of life threatening injuries, airbags must
open with great force, and this force can
pose a potentially deadly risk in some
situations, particularly when a front seat
occupant is not properly buckled up. The
most effective way to reduce the risk of
unnecessary airbag injuries without
reducing the overall safety of the vehicle
is to make sure all occupants are properly
restrained in the vehicle, especially in the
front seat. This provides the protection of
seatbelts and permits the airbags to
provide the additional protection they were
designed to provide. If you choose to
deactivate your airbag, you are losing the
very significant risk reducing benefits of
the airbag and you are also reducing the
effectiveness of the seatbelts, because
seatbelts in modern vehicles are designed
to work as a safety system with the
airbags.
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Deactivation Criteria
(Excluding Canada)
WARNING: This vehicle has special
energy management seatbelts for the
driver and right front passenger. These
particular seatbelts are specifically
designed to work with airbags to help
reduce the risk of injury in a crash. The
energy management seatbelt gives or
releases additional seatbelt webbing in
some accidents to reduce the
concentration of force on an occupant's
chest and to reduce the risk of certain
bone fractures and injuries to underlying
organs. In a crash, if the airbag is off, this
energy management seatbelt might
permit the passenger wearing the
seatbelt to move forward enough to
have a serious or fatal injury. The more
severe the crash, and the heavier the
occupant, the greater the risk. Make sure
the airbag is on for any passenger who
does not qualify under the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration
deactivation criteria.
1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old)
must ride in the front seat because:
• The vehicle has no rear seat.
• The vehicle has a rear seat too small
to accommodate a rear-facing infant
seat.
• The infant has a medical condition
which, according to the infant's
physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front so that the
driver can constantly monitor the
child's condition.
2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must
ride in the front seat because:
• The vehicle has no rear seat.
• Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in
the rear seat(s) whenever possible,
children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must
ride in the front because no space is
available in the rear seat(s) of the
vehicle.
• The child has a medical condition
which, according to the child's
physician, makes it necessary for the
child to ride in the front seat so that the
driver can constantly monitor the
child's condition.
35
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
3. Medical condition. A passenger has a
medical condition which, according to his
or her physician:
• Causes the passenger airbag to pose
a special risk for the passenger.
• Makes the potential harm from the
passenger airbag in a crash greater
than the potential harm from turning
off the airbag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the
dashboard or windshield in a crash.
Transport Canada Deactivation Criteria
(Canada Only)
WARNING: This vehicle has special
energy management seatbelts for the
driver and right front passenger. These
particular seatbelts are specifically
designed to work with airbags to help
reduce the risk of injury in a crash. The
energy management seatbelt gives or
releases additional seatbelt webbing in
some accidents to reduce the
concentration of force on an occupant's
chest and to reduce the risk of certain
bone fractures and injuries to underlying
organs. In a crash, if the airbag is off, this
energy management seatbelt might
permit the passenger wearing the
seatbelt to move forward enough to
have a serious or fatal injury. The more
severe the crash, and the heavier the
occupant, the greater the risk. Make sure
the airbag is on for any passenger who
does not qualify under the Transport
Canada deactivation criteria.
1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old)
must ride in the front seat because:
• My vehicle has no rear seat.
• The rear seat in my vehicle cannot
accommodate a rear-facing infant
seat.
• The infant has a medical condition
which, according to the infant's
physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front seat so that
the driver can monitor the infant's
condition.
2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or
under must ride in the front seat because:
• My vehicle has no rear seat.
• Although children age 12 and under ride
in the rear seat whenever possible,
children age 12 and under have no
option but to sometimes ride in the
front seat because rear seat space is
insufficient.
• The child has a medical condition that,
according to the child's physician,
makes it necessary for the child to ride
in the front seat so that the driver can
monitor the child's condition.
3. Medical condition: A passenger has a
medical condition that, according to his or
her physician:
• Poses a special risk for the passenger
if the airbag deploys.
• Makes the potential harm from the
passenger airbag deployment greater
than the potential harm from turning
off the airbag and experiencing a crash
without the protection offered by the
airbag.
36
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING: National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at
least 10 in (25 cm) between an
occupant's chest and the driver airbag
module.
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. Properly seated occupants sit
upright, lean against the seat back, and
center themselves on the seat cushion,
with their feet comfortably extended on
the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
forward or sideways, or puts one or both
feet up, the chance of injury during a crash
is greatly increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
E142846
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Modifying or adding
equipment to the front end of the vehicle
(including frame, bumper, front end body
structure and tow hooks) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not
modify the front end of the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide
information to the restraints control
module. The restraints control module
deploys (activates) the front safety belt
pretensioners, driver airbag and passenger
airbag. Based on the type of accident, the
restraints control module will deploy the
appropriate safety devices.
37
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above safety
devices plus the crash sensors. The
readiness of the safety system is indicated
by a warning indicator light in the
instrument cluster or by a backup tone if
the warning light is not working. See
Instrument Cluster (page 57). Routine
maintenance of the airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
E67017
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
• The readiness light will either flash or
stay lit.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically
until the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The safety belt pretensioners and the
airbag supplemental restraint system are
designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains frontal deceleration sufficient to
cause the restraints control module to
deploy a safety device.
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners
or airbags did not activate in a crash does
not mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (such as crash severity, belt
usage) were not appropriate to activate
these safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The design of the safety belt
pretensioners is to activate in frontal
or near-frontal crashes and may deploy
in rollovers if the vehicle is equipped
with roll stability control.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
38
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Licence exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
• This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).
Vehicles with the remote start feature will
have a greater range. One of the following
could cause a decrease in operating range:
• Weather conditions.
• Nearby radio towers.
• Structures around the vehicle.
• Other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.
Other short distance radio transmissions,
for example amateur radios, medical
equipment, wireless headphones, remote
controls and alarm systems can also use
the radio frequency used by your remote
control. If the frequencies are jammed, you
will not be able to use your remote control.
You can lock and unlock the doors with the
key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Note: The remote control contains sensitive
electrical components. Exposure to moisture
or impact may cause permanent damage.
REMOTE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
E195660
Note: If there are problems with the remote
entry system, make sure to take all remote
entry transmitters with you to an authorized
dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the
problem.
Note: If your vehicle is fitted with the
E-Guard Cargo Protection System™, the
remote transmitter unlock command only
unlocks the front doors. The side or rear
cargo doors can only be unlocked from
outside your vehicle using the key.
39
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Reprogramming the Remote
Control
You must have all remote controls readily
accessible before beginning this
procedure. Any remote control that is not
present during the programming procedure
will no longer operate your vehicle.
Note: You can program a maximum of four
coded keys to your vehicle.
Note: Do not apply the brake pedal during
this procedure.
1. Switch the ignition from off to on 8
times within 10 seconds, finishing in the
on position. The doors lock then unlock
to confirm that programming has
started.
2. Press any button on the remote control
that you want to program within 20
seconds. The doors lock then unlock
to confirm that programming was
successful.
3. Repeat step 2 to program each
additional remote control.
4. After you have programmed all remote
controls, switch the ignition off.
5. The doors lock then unlock to confirm
that programming is complete.
Changing the Remote Control
Battery
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
E107998
Make sure that you dispose of
old batteries in an
environmentally friendly way.
Seek advice from your local authority
about recycling old batteries.
E195662
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the
transmitter near the key ring to remove
the battery cover.
Note: Do not remove the rubber cover and
circuit board from the front housing of the
remote entry transmitter.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
2. Remove the old battery.
40
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E195661
3. Insert the new battery. Refer to the
symbols inside the transmitter for the
correct orientation of the battery.
Press the battery down to make sure
it is fully in the housing.
4. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the transmitter.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within
three seconds. The horn sounds
and the direction indicators
flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using
the panic alarm.
Sounding the Panic Alarm
E138624
Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
again or switch the ignition on to
turn it off.
Note: The panic alarm operates regardless
of the ignition position.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle.
41
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control
or the remote control to lock and unlock
your vehicle.
Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
E195623
A
B
Lock.A
Unlock.B
Remote Control (If Equipped)
You can use the remote control at any time
when the ignition is off.
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage
Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door.
Press the button again within three
seconds to unlock all doors. The direction
indicators flash.
Note: The driver door can be unlocked with
the key if the remote control is not
functioning.
Note: When you leave your vehicle
unattended for several weeks, the remote
control turns off. Your vehicle must be
unlocked and started. Unlocking and
starting your vehicle once enables the
remote control.
Reprogramming the Unlocking Function
Note: When you press the unlock button,
either all the doors are unlocked or only the
driver door is unlocked. Pressing the unlock
button again unlocks all the doors.
You can reprogram the unlocking function
so that only the driver door is unlocked.
Press and hold the unlock and lock buttons
on the remote control simultaneously for
at least four seconds with the ignition off.
The direction indicators flash twice to
confirm the change.
To return to the original unlocking function,
repeat the process.
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all
doors. The direction indicators
flash.
Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors are
closed. The doors lock again, the horn
sounds and the direction indicators flash
if all the doors are closed.
Note: If any door is open, the horn sounds
twice and the direction indicators do not
flash.
42
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
Autolock Feature
The autolock feature locks all the doors
when:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
• The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed and your vehicle has been in
motion at a speed greater than 12 mph
(20 km/h).
Autounlock Feature
The autounlock feature unlocks all the
doors when:
• Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off or to accessory.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or
to accessory.
Note: If you electronically lock your vehicle
after you switch the ignition off with the
driver door closed, the doors do not
autounlock.
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and
Autounlock
You can enable or disable the autolock and
autounlock features independently of each
other.
To enable or disable autolock, do the
following:
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press the power door unlock control
three times.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Press the power door unlock control
three times.
5. Switch the ignition on. The horn sounds
indicating your vehicle is in
programming mode.
6. Press the power door unlock control
and within five seconds, press the
power door lock control. The horn
sounds once if disabled or twice if
enabled.
7. Switch the ignition off. The horn sounds
indicating programming is complete.
Note: You can also switch this feature on
or off using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 63).
To enable or disable autounlock, do the
following:
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press the power door unlock control
three times.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Press the power door unlock control
three times.
5. Switch the ignition on. The horn sounds
indicating your vehicle is in
programming mode.
6. Press the power door lock control and
within five seconds, press the power
door unlock control. The horn sounds
once if disabled or twice if enabled.
7. Switch the ignition off. The horn sounds
indicating programming is complete.
Note: You can also switch this feature on
or off using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 63).
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when you unlock the
doors with the remote control.
The lamps turn off if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock
button.
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
43
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
The lamps do not turn off if:
• You switch them on with the lighting
control.
• Any door is open.
44
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may cause vehicle starting problems
if they are too close to the key when starting
the engine. Prevent these objects from
touching the coded key while starting the
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the
coded key and restart the engine if a
problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
SecuriLock®
The system is an engine immobilization
system designed to prevent someone from
starting the engine unless they use a
correctly coded key for your vehicle. Using
an incorrectly coded key may prevent the
engine from starting. A message may
appear in the information display. If you
are unable to start the engine with a
correctly coded key, a malfunction has
happened and a message may appear in
the information display.
Automatic Arming
The engine immobilization system arms
immediately after you switch the ignition
off.
Automatic Disarming
Switching the ignition on with a correctly
coded key disarms the engine
immobilization system.
Replacement Keys
If your keys become lost or stolen and you
do not have a spare correctly coded key,
you need to have your vehicle towed to an
authorized dealer. You need to erase the
coded keys from your vehicle and program
new coded keys.
Store an extra correctly coded key away
from the vehicle in a safe place to help
prevent any inconveniences. See an
authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Note: Your vehicle comes with two
integrated keyhead transmitters.
Programming a Spare Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter
You can program your own integrated
keyhead transmitter or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle.
This procedure programs both the engine
immobilizer keycode and the remote entry
portion of the remote control to your
vehicle
Only use integrated keyhead transmitters
or standard SecuriLock keys.
You must have two previously
programmed correctly coded keys and the
new unprogrammed key readily accessible.
See an authorized dealer to have the spare
key programmed if two previously
programmed correctly coded keys are not
available.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously programmed
correctly coded key into the ignition.
2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Switch the ignition off and remove the
first correctly coded key from the
ignition.
45
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Security
4. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off,
insert the second previously correctly
coded key into the ignition.
5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Switch the ignition off and remove the
second previously programmed
correctly coded key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off
and removing the previously
programmed correctly coded key,
insert the new unprogrammed key into
the ignition.
8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least six seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed
correctly coded key from the ignition.
If you successfully program the key, it
starts the engine and operates the remote
entry system, if the new key is an
integrated keyhead transmitter.
If you did not successfully program the key,
wait 10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through
8. If you are still unsuccessful, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Note: You can program a maximum of
eight coded keys to your vehicle. All eight
can be integrated keyhead transmitters.
46
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Security
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL
WARNING: Do not adjust the
steering wheel when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 73).
E261502
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
E261503
3. Lock the steering column.
CRUISE CONTROL - VEHICLES
WITH: ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL
E191337
See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 104).
47
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Steering Wheel
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
E172816
• Rotate away from you for a long wipe
interval.
• Rotate toward you for a short wipe
interval.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
E172818
• A brief press causes a single wipe
without washer fluid.
• A brief press and hold causes the
wipers to swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• A long press and hold turns on the
wipers and washer fluid for up to 10
seconds.
A wipe occurs a few seconds after washing
to clear any remaining washer fluid. You
can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 63).
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This could
cause the washer pump to overheat.
49
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in the Exterior Front
Lamps and Rear Lamps
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have
vents to accommodate normal changes
in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
E142449
Lamps off.A
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
rear lamps.
B
Headlamps.C
Headlamp High Beam
E308790
Push the lever away from you to
switch the high beam on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.
50
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Lighting
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam
E311233
Slightly pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may
need to override the system if it does not
turn the headlamps on in low visibility
conditions, for example daytime fog.
Autolamps turn the headlamps on in low
light situations or when the wipers operate.
Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position.
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on.
Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you
cannot switch the high beams on until the
system turns the low beams on.
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps
When you switch the autolamps on, the
headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of
switching the wipers on. They turn off
approximately 60 seconds after you switch
the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on with the
wipers:
• During a single wipe.
• When using the windshield washers.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch the autolamps and the
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
The instrument lighting dimmer buttons
are on the lighting control.
E291299
E291298
Repeatedly press one of the
buttons to adjust the brightness.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The daytime running
lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash.
51
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Lighting
The system turns the lamps on in daylight
conditions.
To switch the system on, switch the
lighting control to any position except
headlamps.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E311431
Push the lever up or down to use
the direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times.
52
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Lighting
WHAT IS AUTOMATIC HIGH
BEAM CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
The system turns on high beams if it is dark
enough and no other traffic is present. If it
detects an approaching vehicle’s
headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting
ahead, the system turns the high beams
off. Low beams remain on.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle,
continuously monitors conditions to turn
the high beams on and off.
SWITCHING AUTOMATIC HIGH
BEAM CONTROL ON AND OFF
(IF EQUIPPED)
Switch the system on or off using the
information display. See General
Information (page 63).
Activating the Automatic High
Beam Control
Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position to activate.
See Autolamps (page 51).
Note: Automatic high beams are not
available when autolamps are not turned
on.
When active, the high beams turn on if:
• The ambient light level is low enough.
• There is no traffic in front of your
vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 32 mph (52 km/h).
When active, the high beams turn off if:
• The ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
• The system detects an approaching
vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps.
• The system detects severe rain, snow
or fog.
• The camera is blocked.
• The vehicle speed falls below
approximately 27 mph (44 km/h).
Note: The deactivation speed is lower on
curves.
Note: High beam reactivation may be
delayed in certain curvy road situations.
Note: The system may not operate properly
if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield
free from obstruction or damage.
Note: The system may not operate properly
in cold or inclement conditions. You can
switch on the high beams by overriding the
system.
Note: If the system detects a blockage, for
example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
or ice, the system goes into low beam mode
until you clear the blockage. A message may
appear in the information display if the
camera is blocked.
Note: Using much larger tires or equipping
vehicle accessories such as snowplows can
modify your vehicle's ride height and
degrade automatic high beam control
performance.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL INDICATORS (IF
EQUIPPED)
The indicator illuminates to
confirm when the system is
ready to assist.
53
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Automatic High Beam Control
OVERRIDING AUTOMATIC
HIGH BEAM CONTROL (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may
need to override the system if it does not
turn the high beams on or off.
WARNING: You may need to
override the system when approaching
other road users.
WARNING: You may need to
override the system during inclement
weather.
E308790
Push the lever away from you to switch
between high beam and low beam.
54
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Automatic High Beam Control
POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not
let them play with the power windows.
They may seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the
power windows, you should verify they
are free of obstructions and make sure
that children and pets are not in the
proximity of the window openings.
E163056
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the switch to open the window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the switch fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for
several minutes when you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
door.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS (IF EQUIPPED)
Power Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not adjust the
mirrors when your vehicle is moving.
E163059
B
A
C
Left mirror.A
Off.B
Right mirror.C
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
2. Move the control in the direction you
want to tilt the mirror.
3. Return the control to the center
position to lock the mirrors in place.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
55
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Telescoping Mirrors (If Equipped)
E163061
This feature lets you extend the mirror
about 3 in (75 mm). It is useful when
towing a trailer. You can manually pull out
or push in the mirrors to the desired
position.
INTERIOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not adjust the
mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
side.
Manual Dimming Mirror
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce the effect of bright light from
behind.
Automatic Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. A rear center
passenger or raised rear center head
restraint may also block light from reaching
the sensor.
The mirror dims to reduce the effect of
bright light from behind. It returns to
normal when the bright light from behind
is no longer present or if you shift into
reverse (R).
SUN VISORS (IF EQUIPPED)
Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
56
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES
2.3 Inch Display
E219638
Engine oil pressure gauge.A
Engine coolant temperature gauge.B
Fuel gauge.C
Transmission fluid temperature gauge.D
Speedometer.E
Information display.F
Tachometer.G
57
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
8 Inch Display
E299699
Engine oil pressure gauge.A
Engine coolant temperature gauge.B
Fuel gauge.C
Transmission fluid temperature gauge.D
Speedometer.E
Information display.F
Tachometer.G
58
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Indicates engine oil pressure. At normal
operating temperature, the level indicator
is in the normal range. If the pressure gauge
falls below the normal range, stop your
vehicle, switch off the engine and check
the engine oil level. Add oil if needed. If the
oil level is correct, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator is in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
possible, switch off the engine and let the
engine cool.
Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge indicates about how much
fuel is in the fuel tank.
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump
symbol indicates on which side of your
vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a slope.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel level reminder displays and
sounds when the distance to empty
reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for
MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi
(40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km)
for all vehicle keys.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
Distance to Empty
Indicates the approximate distance your
vehicle can travel on the fuel remaining in
the tank. Changes in driving pattern can
cause the value to not only decrease but
also increase or stay constant for periods
of time.
Transmission Fluid Temperature
Gauge
Indicates transmission fluid temperature.
At normal operating temperature, the level
indicator is in the normal range. If the
transmission fluid temperature exceeds
the normal range, stop your vehicle as soon
as possible and verify the airflow is not
restricted by snow or debris blocking
airflow through the grille.
Special operating conditions such as
snowplowing, towing, or off-road use may
cause higher than normal operating
temperatures. See Special Operating
Conditions Scheduled Maintenance
(page 255).
To lower the transmission temperature
into the normal range, alter the severity of
your driving conditions. Operating the
transmission for extended periods with the
gauge in the higher than normal area may
cause internal transmission damage. If the
gauge continues to show high
temperatures, see an authorized dealer.
59
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and
indicators alert you to a vehicle condition
that may become serious. Some lamps
illuminate when you start your vehicle to
make sure they work. If any lamps remain
on after starting your vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning lamp for further
information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and operate the
same as a warning lamp but do not
illuminate when you start your vehicle.
Airbag Warning Lamp
E67017
If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, continues
to flash or remains on when the
engine is running, this indicates a
malfunction. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Lamp
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. Your vehicle
continues to have normal braking without
the anti-lock brake system function. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have an authorized dealer
check the system immediately.
Brake System Warning Lamp
WARNING: Driving your vehicle
with the warning lamp on is dangerous.
A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It may take you
longer to stop your vehicle. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Driving extended distances with the
parking brake engaged can cause brake
failure and the risk of personal injury.
Note: Indicators vary depending on region.
This lamp is a dual function lamp and will
illuminate when:
• You apply the parking brake with the
ignition on.
• Your vehicle has a brake fault or low
brake fluid level, regardless of parking
brake position.
E270480
If the lamp illuminates while you
are moving, you may have the
parking brake applied. Be sure
that the parking brake is off.
Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible if the lamp
continues to illuminate.
Cruise Control Indicator (If Equipped)
E71340
It illuminates when you switch
the system on.
See What Is Cruise Control
(page 103).
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when you switch on
the left or right direction
indicator or the hazard warning
flasher. If the indicators stay on or flash
faster, check for a burned out bulb.
60
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Lamp
If it illuminates when your vehicle
is moving, this indicates that the
engine is overheating. Stop your
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and
switch the engine off. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Engine Oil
It illuminates when you switch
the ignition on.
If it illuminates when the engine
is running this indicates a malfunction.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. If the oil level is sufficient,
this indicates a system malfunction. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
See Engine Oil Check (page 163).
Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp
E71880
It illuminates and a tone sounds
until you fasten the seatbelts.
Headlamp High Beam Indicator
It illuminates when you switch
the headlamp high beam on.
Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp
If it illuminates when you are
driving, refuel as soon as
possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp
(If Equipped)
It illuminates if the tire pressure
in one or more tires is below the
correct tire pressure.
It also illuminates momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
Powertrain
Malfunction/Electronic Throttle
Control
Illuminates when the system
detects a powertrain fault, have
an authorized dealer check the
system as soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
If it illuminates when the engine
is running this indicates a
malfunction. The On Board
Diagnostics system has detected a
malfunction of the vehicle emission control
system.
If it flashes, engine misfire may be
occurring. Increased exhaust gas
temperatures could damage the catalytic
converter or other vehicle components.
Avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration
and have your vehicle serviced
immediately.
It illuminates when you switch the ignition
on prior to engine start to check the bulb
and to indicate whether your vehicle is
ready for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) testing.
Normally, it illuminates until the engine is
cranked and automatically turns off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after
15 seconds it flashes eight times, this
indicates that your vehicle is not ready for
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
See Emission Law (page 88).
61
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Traction Control Indicator
E138639
It flashes during a traction
control event.
If it does not illuminate when you switch
the ignition on, or remains on when the
engine is running, this indicates a
malfunction. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
Traction Control System Off
E130458
It will illuminate when the driver
disables traction control.
Tow Haul Indicator
E246592
Illuminates when the driver
activates the tow/haul feature.
If the light flashes steadily, have
an authorized dealer check the system
immediately, damage to the transmission
could occur.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
Key in Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when you open the driver's door
and you have left the key in the ignition.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking
brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
system checked by your authorized dealer
immediately.
62
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Note: Trailer options are not available if
your vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Note: Some MyKey menu options only
appear if MyKey is enabled and at least one
MyKey is programmed.
Information Display Controls
E184451
• Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm a setting or messages.
E204495
This icon shows the features on
or off status. A check in the box
indicates the feature is on, and
unchecked indicates the feature is off.
2.3 Inch Display Menu
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Main Menu
Trip 1
Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Driver Assist
Settings
63
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Information Displays
Trip 1 or 2
Displays the following of an individual
journey.
• Digital speed.
• Distance.
• Time.
• Distance to empty.
• Average fuel economy.
Note: Press and hold OK to reset values.
Fuel Economy
Displays the following:
• Instant fuel economy.
• Average fuel economy.
• Average speed.
• Distance to empty.
Note: Press and hold OK to reset values.
Driver Assist
Displays the following:
• Progressive range select.
• Engine hours.
• Maintenance monitor
Settings
Settings
Select Your SettingLocksVehicle
Select Your SettingUnitsDisplay Setup
Temperature
Language
8 Inch Display Menu
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Main Menu
MyView
Trip/Fuel
Truck Info
Settings
64
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Information Displays
MyView
MyView
Trip 1
Fuel Economy
Press OK for more optionsConfigure MyView
Trip/Fuel
Trip/Fuel
Trip 1
Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
Trip 1 or 2
Displays the following of an individual
journey.
• Trip timer.
• Distance to empty.
• Trip odometer.
• Average fuel economy.
Note: Press and hold OK to reset values.
Fuel Economy
Displays your instantaneous fuel usage as
a bar graph and average mpg.
Fuel History
Displays your fuel usage based on time.
The graph is updated each minute with the
fuel economy that you achieved during 30
minutes of driving.
Truck Info
Truck Info
Digital Speedometer
Dual Fuel Tanks
Engine Information
Maintenance Monitor
• Engine Information - Shows engine hours, engine idle hours and engine oil temp and
oil life.
65
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Settings
Select Your SettingLightingVehicleAdvanced
Settings
Easy Entry/Exit
Locks
Windows
Wiper Controls
Select Your SettingUnitsDisplay Setup
Temperature
Language
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options
equipped with your vehicle, not all of the
messages will display or be available.
Certain messages may be abbreviated or
shortened depending upon which cluster
type you have.
AdvanceTrac and Traction Control
ActionMessage
The system detects a condition that requires service. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Service AdvanceTrac
The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
off.
AdvanceTrac Off
The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
on.
AdvanceTrac On
The status of the traction control system after you switched
it off. See Using Traction Control (page 100).
Traction Control Off
The status of the traction control system after you switched
it on. See Using Traction Control (page 100).
Traction Control On
66
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Information Displays
Battery and Charging System
ActionMessage
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Check Charging System
The battery management system detects an extended low-
voltage condition. Your vehicle will disable various features
to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical
loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the
system voltage has recovered, the disabled features will
operate again as normal.
Low Battery Features
Temporarily Turned Off
The battery management system determines that the battery
is at a low state of charge. Turn your ignition off as soon as
possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once
you restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has
recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will allow
faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off To Save
Battery
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
The driver door is not completely closed.Driver Door Ajar
The passenger door is not completely closed.Passenger Door Ajar
The system has disabled the door switches.Switches Inhibited
Security Mode
Engine
ActionMessage
The engine has reduced power to help reduce high
engine temperature.
Power Reduced to Lower Engine
Temp
67
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Information Displays
Fuel
ActionMessage
An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off the
engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Low Engine Oil Pressure
The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less.Change Engine Oil Soon
The oil life left is at 0%.Oil Change Required
The brake fluid level is low, inspect the brake system immedi-
ately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 171).
Brake Fluid Level Low
The brake system needs servicing. Stop your vehicle in a safe
place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Check Brake System
Your vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This may
not allow some features to operate properly. See an author-
ized dealer.
Transport / Factory
Mode Contact Dealer
The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.See Manual
68
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Information Displays
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system detects a condition that requires
service. See an authorized dealer.
Steering Fault Service
Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Loss Stop
Safely
The power steering system detects a condition within the
power steering system or passive entry or passive start system
requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault
Service Required
The steering lock system detects a condition that requires
service. See an authorized dealer.
Steering Lock Malfunc-
tion Service Now
Transmission
ActionMessage
You switched the engine off and shift select lever is in any
position other than park (P).
Shift to Park
Displays when the brake pedal needs to be depressed.Press Brake Pedal
The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a
safe place as soon as it’s possible.
Transmission Over
Temperature Stop
Safely
See an authorized dealer.Transmission Service
Required
The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a
safe place as soon as it’s possible.
Transmission Too Hot
Press Brake
The transmission has limited functionality. See an authorized
dealer.
Transmission Limited
Function See Manual
A reminder to shift into park. In addition, this message is typical
after reconnecting or recharging the battery until you cycle
the ignition to the on mode. See Changing the 12V Battery
(page 173).
Transmission Not in Park
Displays when the brake pedal needs to be depressed to
enable the transmission to shift from park.
Depress Brake to Shift
from Park
69
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Information Displays
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
Heater Only System (If Equipped)
E305221
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls may look different
from what you see here.
Directing the Air
Turn the control to direct the air.
E266044
Direct air to the instrument panel
air vents.
E266043
Direct air to the footwell air
vents.
E266042
Direct air to the instrument panel
and footwell air vents.
Direct air to the windshield air
vents. You can also use this
setting to defog and clear the
windshield of a thin covering of ice.
Setting the Blower Motor Speed
Turn the control to adjust the
volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
Setting the Temperature
E266045
E266046
Turn the control to set the temperature.
Switching the Heater On and Off
E265297
Turn the control.
Manual Climate Control (If Equipped)
E305209
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls may look different
from what you see here.
Directing the Air
Turn the control to direct the air.
E266044
Direct air to the instrument panel
air vents.
E266043
Direct air to the footwell air
vents.
E266042
Direct air to the instrument panel
and footwell air vents.
70
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Climate Control
Direct air to the windshield air
vents. You can also use this
setting to defog and clear the
windshield of a thin covering of ice.
Switching the Air Conditioning On and
Off
E266041
Turn to switch the air
conditioning on or off.
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning
On and Off
Turn the control for maximum
cooling.
Recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents and air conditioning
turns on.
Setting the Blower Motor Speed
Turn the control to adjust the
volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
Setting the Temperature
E266045
E266046
Turn the control to set the temperature.
Switching the Climate Control On and
Off
E265297
Turn the control.
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield
during humid weather, adjust the air
distribution control to the windshield air
vents position.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
Quickly Heating the Interior
1. Adjust the fan speed to the highest
speed setting.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
full heat setting.
3. Direct air to the footwell air vents.
Recommended Settings for
Heating
1. Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings.
71
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Climate Control
3. Direct air to the footwell air vents.
Quickly Cooling the Interior
1. Turn to MAX A/C.
2. Drive with the windows open until you
feel cold air through the air vents.
Recommended Settings for
Cooling
1. Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.
3. Direct air to the instrument panel air
vents.
Vehicle Stationary for Extended
Periods During Extreme High
Ambient Temperatures
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Place your vehicle in park (P) or
neutral.
3. Turn to MAX A/C.
4. Adjust the fan speed to the lowest
speed setting.
Defogging the Side Windows in
Cold Weather
1. Direct air to the instrument panel and
windshield vents.
2. Turn to NORM A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
4. Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.
5. Direct air toward the side windows.
6. Close the instrument panel vents.
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE
CONTROLS
Setting the Blower Motor Speed
E305193
Turn the control to adjust the volume of
air circulated in the vehicle.
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls may look different
from what you see here.
Switching the Rear Climate
Control On and Off
E265297
Turn the control.
72
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out
of position or with the seatback reclined
too far can take weight off the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in the event of a
crash. Always sit upright against your
seat back, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the
seatback too far as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seatbelt,
resulting in serious injury in the event of
a collision.
WARNING: Do not place objects
higher than the top of the seat backrest.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death in the
event of a sudden stop or crash.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, seatbelt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seat backrest so that
your torso is more than 30° from the
upright position.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
seatbelt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
E190815
73
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Seats
The front row outboard non-adjustable
head restraints consist of a trimmed foam
covering over the upper structure of the
seatback. Properly adjust the seatback to
an upright driving or riding position, so that
the head restraint is positioned as close as
possible to the back of your head.
MANUAL SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Make sure the seat fully
locks into place by rocking it backward
and forward. Not securing the seat into
the locked position can be dangerous in
a crash and could cause serious personal
injury or death.
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward
E190816
Recline Adjustment (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure
that it has fully latched after returning
the seat backrest to its original position.
An unlatched seat may become
dangerous if you stop suddenly or have
a crash.
E190817
Manual Lumbar (If Equipped)
E166702
The lumbar control is on the inboard side
of the driver seat. Turn the control to adjust
your support.
74
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Seats
POWER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver
seat or seatback while your vehicle is
moving. Adjusting your seatback while
the vehicle is in motion may cause loss
of control of the vehicle.
The control is located on the outboard side
of the seat cushion.
E190818
• Press A to raise or lower the front
portion of the seat cushion.
• Press B to move the seat forward,
backward, up or down.
• Press C to raise or lower the rear
portion of the seat cushion.
Recline Adjustment (If Equipped)
E190819
75
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Seats
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNING: Do not plug optional
electrical accessories into the cigar
lighter socket. Incorrect use of the cigar
lighter can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty, and can result
in fire or serious injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.
If the power supply does not work after you
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition
on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
damages the power point and may blow
the fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
• On the instrument panel.
• Inside the glove box.
• Behind the driver's seat, upper trim
panel.
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not keep electrical
devices plugged in the power point
whenever the device is not in use. Do not
use any extension cord with the 110 volt
AC power point, since it will defeat the
safety protection design. Doing so may
cause the power point to overload due
to powering multiple devices that can
reach beyond the 150 watt load limit and
could result in fire or serious injury.
Note: The power point turns off when you
switch the ignition off, or when the battery
voltage drops below 11 volts.
You can use the power point for electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is
on the rear of the center console.
E194174
To gain access to the outlet contacts,
press the plug against the outlet and rotate
clockwise.
76
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged
in.
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition
is off or no device is plugged in.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
77
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high
engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire or other
damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle or
drive your vehicle on dry grass or other
dry ground cover. The emission system
heats up the engine compartment and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: Do not start the engine
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic.
Always open the garage door before you
start the engine.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger
compartment. If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 mi
(8 km) after you reconnect it. This is
because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You
can disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.
IGNITION SWITCH
E161572
D
E
C
B
A
A (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories, such as the radio, to operate
while the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
position for too long. This could cause your
vehicle battery to lose charge.
B (lock) - Locks the gearshift lever and
allows key removal.
C (off) - The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.
D (on) - All electrical circuits are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
E (start) - Cranks the engine.
STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases, this helps to warm up the
engine. If the engine idle speed does not
slow down automatically, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
78
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Before starting the engine check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park
(P) or neutral (N).
• Turn the ignition key to the on position.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Turn the key to the start position to
start the engine. Release the key when
the engine starts.
Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: If you cannot start the engine on the
first try, wait for a short period and try again.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
3. Start the engine.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
1. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
2. Turn the key to the off position.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING: Switching off the
engine when the vehicle is still moving
will result in a loss of brake and steering
assistance. The steering will not lock, but
higher effort will be required. When the
ignition is switched off, some electrical
circuits, including air bags, warning lamps
and indicators may also be off. If the
ignition was turned off accidentally, you
can shift into neutral (N) and re-start the
engine.
1. Put the transmission into neutral (N)
and use the brakes to bring your vehicle
to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P) or neutral (N) and switch
the ignition off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle checked by your authorized
dealer immediately. Do not drive your
vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes.
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust
fumes. Take precautions to avoid its
dangerous effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods of time, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
79
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Failure to follow engine
block heater instructions could result in
property damage or serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
WARNING: Do not fully close the
hood, or allow it to drop under its own
weight when using the engine block
heater. This could damage the power
cable and may cause an electrical short
resulting in fire, injury and property
damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element, installed in the engine block and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
• If the block heater cord is under the
hood, Do Not remove the wiring from
its original location. Do Not close the
hood on the extension wiring.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
80
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
81
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may
be under pressure. If you hear a hissing
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out, which could cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Fuel may contain
benzene, which is a cancer-causing
agent.
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is
extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
Follow these guidelines when refueling:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always switch the engine off before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic
and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed
immediately call a physician, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
apparent for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel
vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of
fuel vapor can cause serious illness and
permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you
splash fuel in your eyes, immediately
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush
with water for 15 minutes and seek
medical attention. Failure to seek
proper medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
• Fuels can be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If you splash fuel on
your skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
thoroughly wash your skin with soap
and water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing fuel vapors could cause an
adverse reaction, serious personal
injury or sickness. Immediately call a
physician if you experience any adverse
reactions.
FUEL QUALITY - E85
Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel
Vehicles
Flex fuel vehicles have one of the following
identifiers:
• Yellow fuel filler cap.
• Yellow bezel around the fuel filler inlet.
• Yellow fuel filler housing.
• Yellow E85 label on the fuel tank filler
door.
82
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E161513
Your vehicle is designed to operate on
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 or
regular unleaded gasoline blended with a
maximum of 85% ethanol (E85).
Some fuel stations, particularly those in
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87. The use of these fuels
could result in engine damage that will not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well
as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing (page 125).
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal
vehicle and engine performance. For
additional information, refer to
www.toptiergas.com.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuels containing more than 85%
ethanol or E100 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.
Switching Between E85 and
Gasoline
We do not recommend repeatedly
alternating between E85 and gasoline. If
you switch from using E85 to gasoline, or
from gasoline to E85, add as much fuel as
possible, at least half a tank. Drive your
vehicle immediately for a minimum of 5 mi
(8 km) to allow it to adapt to the change
in ethanol concentration. If you use E85
exclusively, we recommend that you fill
the fuel tank with regular unleaded
gasoline at each scheduled oil change.
83
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY - GASOLINE
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
Your vehicle is designed to operate on
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some fuel stations, particularly those in
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87. The use of these fuels
could result in engine damage that will not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well
as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing (page 125).
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal
vehicle and engine performance. For
additional information, refer to
www.toptiergas.com.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Avoid running out of fuel. Running out of
fuel can cause damage not covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
84
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Normally, adding 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel is
enough to restart the engine. If your
vehicle is on a steep grade, more fuel
may be required.
• You may need to cycle the ignition from
off to on several times after refueling
to allow the fuel system to pump the
fuel from the tank to the engine. On
restarting, cranking time will take a few
seconds longer than normal.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING: Flow of fuel through a
fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity. This can cause a fire if you are
filling an ungrounded fuel container.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling.
• Do not fill a fuel container while it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container while filling.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
REFUELING
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns
violently and a fuel fire can cause severe
injuries.
WARNING: Read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island.
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is
extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: Stay outside your
vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle.
WARNING: Keep children away
from the fuel pump. Never let children
pump fuel.
WARNING: Wait at least five
seconds before removing the fuel pump
nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain
into the fuel tank.
WARNING: Stop refueling after the
fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts
off for the second time. Failure to follow
this will fill the expansion space in the
fuel tank and could lead to fuel
overflowing.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel
pump nozzle from its fully inserted
position when refueling.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling
an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the
ground.
• Do not fill a fuel container while it is in
the vehicle (including the cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container while filling.
• Do not use a device that would hold
the fuel pump handle in the fill position.
85
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Fuel Filler Cap
WARNING: The fuel system may
be under pressure. If you hear a hissing
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out, which could cause
serious personal injury.
Note: If you must replace the fuel filler cap,
replace it with a fuel filler cap that is
designed for your vehicle. The customer
warranty may be void for any damage to the
fuel tank or fuel system if the correct
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or other certified
fuel filler cap is not used.
Your fuel tank filler cap has an SAE
standard thread design. When fueling your
vehicle:
1. Put your vehicle in park (P).
2. Switch the engine off.
3. Carefully turn the filler cap
counterclockwise until it spins off.
4. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel
filler pipe and place on the fuel door
hanging hook if equipped.
5. To install the fuel filler cap, hold the
cap by the cover handle and place the
threaded end of the cap into filler pipe.
Turn the cap clockwise until it clicks at
least once.
If the Check Fuel Cap light or a Check Fuel
Cap message appears in the instrument
cluster and stays on after you start the
engine, you may not have installed the fuel
filler properly.
If the fuel cap light remains on, at the next
opportunity, safely pull off of the road,
remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap
properly and reinstall it. The check fuel cap
light or Check fuel cap message may not
reset immediately. It may take several
driving cycles for the indicators to turn off.
A driving cycle consists of an engine
start-up (after four or more hours with the
engine off) followed by normal city and
highway driving.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Advertised Capacity
The advertised capacity is the maximum
amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank after running out of fuel. Included in
the advertised capacity is an empty
reserve. The empty reserve is an
unspecified amount of fuel that remains
in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge
indicates empty.
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range.
Fuel Economy
Your vehicle calculates fuel economy
figures through the trip computer average
fuel function. See General Information
(page 63).
The first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) of driving is
the break-in period of the engine. A more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2,000 mi (3,000 km).
Impacting Fuel Economy
• Incorrect tire inflation pressures.
• Fully loading your vehicle.
• Carrying unnecessary weight.
86
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars
or light bars, running boards and ski
racks.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol. See
Fuel Quality (page 82).
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
• Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
• You may get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.
87
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
EMISSION LAW
WARNING: Do not remove or alter
the original equipment floor covering or
insulation between it and the metal floor
of the vehicle. The floor covering and
insulation protect occupants of the
vehicle from the engine and exhaust
system heat and noise. On vehicles with
no original equipment floor covering
insulation, do not carry passengers in a
manner that permits prolonged skin
contact with the metal floor. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in
fire or personal injury.
U.S. federal laws and certain state laws
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative
emission control system components.
Similar federal or provincial laws may
apply in Canada. We do not approve of any
vehicle modification without first
determining applicable laws.
Tampering with emissions
control systems including
related sensors or the Diesel
Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced
engine power and the illumination of the
service engine soon light.
Tampering With a Noise Control
System
Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
• Removal or rendering inoperative by
any person other than for purposes of
maintenance.
• Repair or replacement of any device or
element of the design incorporated into
a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control prior to its sale or delivery to
the ultimate purchaser or while it is in
use.
• The use of the vehicle after any person
removes or renders inoperative any
device or element of the design.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
may presume to constitute tampering as
follows:
• Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
absorbers, fender apron barriers,
underbody noise shields or acoustically
absorptive material.
• Tampering or rendering inoperative the
engine speed governor, to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer
specifications.
If the engine does not start, runs rough,
experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive
exhaust smoke, check for the following:
• A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
• A plugged engine air filter element.
• Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
• A clogged fuel filter.
• Contaminated fuel.
• Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
• An open or pinched sensor hose.
• Incorrect engine oil level.
88
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Engine Emission Control
• Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.
• Incorrect engine oil viscosity for
climactic conditions.
Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
Note: If these checks do not help you
correct the concern, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Noise Emissions Warranty,
Prohibited Tampering Acts and
Maintenance
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation
became effective governing the noise
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb
(4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The preceding statements
concerning prohibited tampering acts and
maintenance, and the noise warranty
found in the Warranty Guide, are
applicable to complete chassis cabs over
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNING: Do not park, idle or
drive your vehicle on dry grass or other
dry ground cover. The emission system
heats up the engine compartment and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: The normal operating
temperature of the exhaust system is
very high. Never work around or attempt
to repair any part of the exhaust system
until it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter heats up to a very
high temperature after only a short
period of engine operation and stays hot
after the engine is switched off.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger
compartment. If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle has various emission control
components and a catalytic converter that
enables it to comply with applicable
exhaust emission standards.
To make sure that the catalytic converter
and other emission control components
continue to work properly:
• Do not crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time.
• Do not run the engine with a spark plug
lead disconnected.
• Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 142).
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
Note: Resulting component damage may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use anything other than Ford,
Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for
maintenance replacements or for service
of components affecting emission control,
such non-Ford parts should be equivalent
to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.
89
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Engine Emission Control
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicle’ s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your warranty information
for complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the
environment by making sure that your
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system
also assists a service technician in properly
servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate. Examples are:
1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 85).
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
out. After three driving cycles without these
or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time you start the
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed city and
highway driving. No additional vehicle
service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness and
lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, your vehicle may need
service. See On-Board Diagnostics.
90
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Engine Emission Control
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that your vehicle is ready
for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing,
you can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least
eight hours with the ignition off. Then,
start the vehicle and complete the
above driving cycle. The vehicle must
warm up to its normal operating
temperature. Once started, do not turn
off the vehicle until the above driving
cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M
testing, you need to repeat the above
driving cycle.
91
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Engine Emission Control
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING: Apply the parking
brake, shift into park (P), switch the
ignition off and remove the key before
you leave your vehicle. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
E307627
P R N D M 2 1
Putting your vehicle in or out of
gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the
preferred gear.
3. When you finish driving, come to a
complete stop.
4. Move the gearshift lever and securely
latch it in park (P).
5. Release the brake pedal and the
transmission remains in the selected
gear.
Park (P)
This position locks the transmission and
prevents the wheels from turning.
Reverse (R)
With the transmission in reverse (R), your
vehicle moves backward. Always come to
a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the transmission in neutral (N), you
can start your vehicle and it is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down when in this
position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through six.
Manual (M)
Moving the gearshift lever to the manual
(M) position allows you to manually select
the gear you prefer. Only the current gear
displays. Use the buttons on the gearshift
lever to manually select gears. Press the
+ button to upshift or the – button to
downshift. Return the transmission to a
different gearshift position to deactivate
manual control.
Second (2)
Transmission operates in second (2) gear
only. Use second (2) gear to start-up on
slippery roads.
First (1)
• Transmission operates in first (1) gear
only.
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift
lever.
• Does not downshift into first (1) gear
at high speeds; allows for first (1) gear
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in drive (D) with the tow/haul
feature on or off.
• Press the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an
appropriate gear.
92
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Transmission
Tow/Haul Mode
E161509
To activate tow/haul, press the
button on the gearshift lever.
The TOW HAUL indicator light
illuminates in the instrument cluster.
The tow/haul feature:
• Delays upshifts to reduce the frequency
of transmission shifting.
• Provides engine braking in all forward
gears, which slows your vehicle and
assists you in controlling your vehicle
when descending a slope.
• Depending on driving conditions and
load conditions, may downshift the
transmission, slow your vehicle and
control your vehicle speed when
descending a hill, without pressing the
accelerator pedal. The amount of
downshift braking provided varies
based upon the amount you press the
brake pedal.
The tow/haul feature improves
transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission
gear ranges are available when using
tow/haul.
To deactivate the tow/haul feature and
return to normal driving mode, press the
button on the gearshift lever again. The
TOW HAUL light deactivates. Tow/haul
also deactivates when you power down
your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not use tow/haul
when the road surface is slippery. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle.
Understanding Your SelectShift
Automatic™ Transmission
E318028
Note: When pressing the button on the
gearshift lever, you can cycle through the
available drive modes.
Your vehicle has a SelectShift Automatic™
transmission gearshift lever. The
SelectShift Automatic transmission gives
you the ability to change gears up or down
without a clutch.
To prevent the engine from running at too
low an RPM, which may cause it to stall,
SelectShift still makes some downshifts
if it has determined that you have not
downshifted in time. Although SelectShift
makes some downshifts for you, it still
allows you to downshift at any time if the
SelectShift determines that damage to
the engine does not occur from
over-revving.
SelectShift does not upshift, even if the
engine is approaching the RPM limit. Shift
manually by pressing the + button.
Note: Engine damage may occur if you
maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting.
SelectShift does not automatically upshift,
even if the engine is approaching the RPM
limit. Shift manually by pressing the (+)
paddle.
93
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Transmission
Progressive Range Selection - PRS
(If Equipped)
Progressive Range Selection gives you the
ability to lockout gears from the automatic
shifting range. This may provide you with
an improved driving experience. For
example, in slippery conditions or when
experiencing a steep grade.
With the gearshift lever in drive (D), press
the – button to active PRS. The instrument
cluster indicates the available and selected
gears.
All available gears display with the current
gear indicated. Press the – button again to
lock out gears beginning with the highest
gear. Example: press the – button twice to
lock out 6th and 5th gears. Only the
available gears display, and the
transmission automatically shifts between
the available gears. Press the + button to
unlock gears to allow the transmission to
shift to higher gears. The transmission
shifts within the gear range you select.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature may increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life
of your vehicle. A new vehicle or
transmission may have firm shifts, soft
shifts, or both. This is normal and does not
affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive
learning process fully updates transmission
operation.
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNING: Do not drive your
vehicle until you verify that the
stoplamps are working.
WARNING: When doing this
procedure, you need to take the
transmission out of park (P) which
means your vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement,
always fully apply the parking brake prior
to doing this procedure. Use wheels
chocks if appropriate.
WARNING: If the parking brake is
fully released, but the brake warning
lamp remains illuminated, the brakes
may not be working properly. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Your vehicle has a brake-shift interlock
feature that prevents the gearshift lever
from moving from park (P) when the
ignition is in the 3 (on) position and the
brake pedal is not pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out
of park (P) position with the ignition in the
3 (on) position and the brake pedal
pressed, a malfunction may have occurred.
It is possible that a fuse has blown or your
vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating
properly. See Fuse Specification Chart
(page 151).
If the fuse is not blown and the brake
lamps are working properly, the following
procedure allows you to move the gearshift
lever from park (P):
1. Apply the parking brake. Switch the
ignition key to 1 (off), then remove the
key.
2. Move the steering column to the full
down and full rearward position,
toward the driver seat.
3. Remove the gearshift lever boot.
94
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Transmission
4. Place your fingers into the hole where
you removed the gearshift lever boot
and pull the top half of the shroud up
and forward to separate it from the
lower half of the shroud. There is a
hinge at the forward edge of the top of
the shroud. Roll the top half of the
shroud upward on the hinge point, then
pull straight rearward toward the driver
seat to remove.
5. Remove the top half of the shroud.
6. Remove the three fasteners under the
column that secure the lower shroud
half to the column.
E163185
7. Pull the lock lever into the full unlocked
position and remove the lower shroud
cover by pulling the lever handle
through the slot in the cover.
8. Apply the brake. Gently lift the override
disk and move the gearshift lever into
neutral (N).
E163186
9. Start your vehicle.
Perform Steps 4 through 8 in reverse order,
making sure to engage the hinge pivots
between the upper and lower halves of the
shroud. Keep slight pressure in the forward
direction as you rotate the halves together.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud
or Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the
engine may overheat.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, you
may rock it out by shifting between forward
and reverse gears, stopping between shifts
in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the
accelerator in each gear.
95
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Transmission
LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
(IF EQUIPPED)
This axle provides added traction on
slippery surfaces, particularly when one
wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under
normal conditions, the limited-slip axle
functions like a standard rear axle. The axle
may exhibit a slight noise or vibration
during tight turns with low vehicle speed.
This is normal behavior and indicates the
axle is working.
96
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Rear Axle
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out and should
be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the
vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder
in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an
authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Wheels
(page 185).
E270480
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 60).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Switch the engine off, shift the
transmission into park (P), apply the
parking brake, and then inspect the
accelerator pedal for any interferences. If
none are found and the condition persists,
have your vehicle towed to the nearest
authorized dealer.
Hydraulic brake booster system
(Hydroboost or Hydromax)
The Hydroboost and Hydromax systems
receive fluid pressure from the power
steering pump to provide power assist
during braking.
The Hydromax booster receives backup
pressure from the reserve system electric
pump whenever the fluid in the power
steering system is not flowing. When the
engine is off, the pump turns on if you apply
the brake pedal, or if you switch the ignition
to the on position.
The sound of the pump operating may be
heard by the driver. This is a normal
characteristic of the system.
The reserve system provides reduced
braking power, so the vehicle should be
operated under these conditions with
caution, and only to seek service repair and
removal of the vehicle from the roadway.
Note: For vehicles with the Hydromax
system operating under normal conditions,
the noise of the fluid flowing through the
booster may be heard whenever you apply
the brake. This condition is normal. Vehicle
service is not required.
If braking performance or pedal response
becomes very poor, even when you
strongly press the pedal, it may indicate
the presence of air in the hydraulic system
or leakage of fluid. Stop the vehicle safely
as soon as possible and seek service
immediately.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
The anti-lock braking system does not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
97
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Brakes
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
Note: If the system activates, the brake
pedal may pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You
may also hear a noise from the system. This
is normal.
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake. Make sure you shift into
park (P) for vehicles with an automatic
transmission. Switch the ignition off and
remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.
Apply the parking brake whenever you park
your vehicle.
• For vehicles with a foot operated
parking brake, press the pedal down.
• For vehicles with a hand operated
parking brake, pull the parking brake
lever up.
E144522
It illuminates when you switch
the ignition on and apply the
parking brake. It also illuminates
momentarily when you switch
the ignition on to confirm the
lamp is functional. if is does not
illuminate when you switch the ignition on
or begins to flash at any time, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
If it illuminates when your vehicle is
moving, make sure you disengage the
parking brake.
If the parking brake is disengaged, this
indicates a low brake fluid level or a brake
system fault. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
To release the parking brake:
• For vehicles with a foot operated
parking brake, pull the parking brake
release lever.
• For vehicles with a hand operated
parking brake, push the parking brake
lever down.
HILL START ASSIST
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you
leave your vehicle, always apply the
parking brake.
WARNING: You must remain in
your vehicle when the system turns on.
At all times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required.
Failure to take care may result in the loss
of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system will turn
off if a malfunction is apparent or if you
rev the engine excessively. Failure to take
care may result in the loss of control of
your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
When the system is active, your vehicle
remains stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator pedal.
The system releases the brakes
automatically once the engine has
98
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Brakes
developed sufficient torque to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the slope. This
is an advantage when pulling away on a
slope, for example from a car park ramp,
traffic lights or when reversing uphill into
a parking space.
The system activates on any slope that
causes your vehicle to roll.
Note: There is no warning light to indicate
the system is either on or off.
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep
the brake pedal pressed and shift into
first gear when facing uphill or reverse
(R) when facing downhill.
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
is on a slope, the system activates
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle remains on
the slope without rolling away for
about two to three seconds. This hold
time automatically extends if you are
in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes
automatically.
Note: When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal and press the pedal again when
the system is active, you will experience
significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This
is normal.
Switching the System On and Off
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. The system
remembers the last setting when you start
your vehicle.
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
You cannot turn the system on or off.
When you switch the ignition on, the
system automatically turns on.
99
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING: The traction control
light illuminates steadily if a failure is
detected in the system. Verify that the
traction control system was not
manually disabled using the switch. If
the traction control light is still
illuminating steadily, have the system
serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with
traction control disabled could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Switching the System Off
E194301
The switch for the traction
control system is located on the
instrument panel.
When you switch the system off, an
illuminated icon appears on the instrument
cluster.
Use the switch again to return the traction
control system to normal operation.
System Indicator Lights and
Messages
E138639
The traction control light
temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and flashes
when a driving condition activates the
system.
E194301
The traction control off light
temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and stays on:
• When you switch the traction control
system off.
• If a problem occurs in the system.
100
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Traction Control (If Equipped)
REAR VIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The rear view camera
system is a reverse aid supplement
device that still requires the driver to use
it in conjunction with the interior and
exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close
to either corner of the bumper or under
the bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
WARNING: Reverse your vehicle
as slow as possible, higher speeds may
limit your reaction time to stop your
vehicle.
WARNING: Use caution when the
rear cargo door is ajar. If the rear cargo
door is ajar, the camera will be out of
position and the video image may be
incorrect. All guidelines disappear when
the rear cargo door is ajar. Some vehicles
may not come equipped with guidelines.
WARNING: Use caution when
turning camera features on or off when
the transmission is not in park (P). Make
sure your vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your
vehicle.
Example
E142435
The camera is located on the rear of your
vehicle.
Note: Camera location may vary depending
on the configuration of your vehicle.
Using the Rear View Camera
System
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you place
the transmission in reverse (R).
Note: The image may remain on
momentarily when you shift the
transmission out of reverse (R). If your
vehicle speed reaches 6 mph (10 km/h) or
10 seconds elapse and the image remains
on, have your system inspected by an
authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing behind your vehicle.
This might not provide adequate coverage
as it usually provides in normal operation
and you might not see some objects.
101
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Parking Aids
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if the reverse
lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
• The camera is misaligned due to
damage to the rear of your vehicle.
Rear Camera Delay
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P), the camera image remains on
until your vehicle speed reaches 6 mph
(10 km/h) or 10 seconds elapses. This
occurs when the rear camera delay feature
is ON.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF. The default setting for the rear
camera delay is OFF.
102
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Parking Aids
WHAT IS CRUISE CONTROL
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise
control when your vehicle speed is greater
than 20 mph (30 km/h).
SWITCHING CRUISE CONTROL
ON AND OFF
WARNING: Do not use cruise
control on winding roads, in heavy traffic
or when the road surface is slippery. This
could result in loss of vehicle control,
serious injury or death.
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel. See Cruise Control (page 48).
Switching Cruise Control On
E265296
Press the button.
Switching Cruise Control Off
E265297
Press the button when the
system is in standby mode.
The system also turns off when you switch
the ignition off.
Note: The set speed erases when you
switch the system off.
SETTING THE CRUISE
CONTROL SPEED
WARNING: When you are going
downhill, your vehicle speed could
increase above the set speed. The
system does not apply the brakes.
Drive to the speed you prefer.
Press either button to set the
current speed.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Note: The indicator changes color in the
information display.
Changing the Set Speed
Press and release the button to
increase the set speed in small
increments.
Press and hold the button to accelerate.
Release the button when you reach your
preferred speed.
Press and release the button to
decrease the set speed in small
increments.
Press and hold the button to decelerate.
Release the button when you reach your
preferred speed.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed does not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
CANCELING THE SET SPEED
E265298
Press the button, or tap the
brake pedal to cancel the set
speed.
Note: The system remembers the set
speed.
Note: The system cancels if the vehicle
speed drops below 10 mph (16 km/h) under
the set speed when driving uphill.
103
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
RESUMING THE SET SPEED
Press the button.
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATORS
E71340
Illuminates when you switch the
system on.
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL
WARNING: Always pay close
attention to changing road conditions
when using the system. It does not
replace attentive driving. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use the system
when entering or leaving a highway, on
roads with intersections or roundabouts
or non-vehicular traffic or roads that are
winding, slippery, unpaved, or steep
slopes.
WARNING: Do not use the system
in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy
rain, spray or snow.
WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer that has
aftermarket electronic trailer brake
controls. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use tire sizes
other than those recommended because
this can affect the normal operation of
the system. Failure to do so may result
in a loss of vehicle control, which could
result in serious injury.
WARNING: The system may not
detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
WARNING: The system does not
detect pedestrians or objects in the road.
WARNING: The system does not
detect oncoming vehicles in the same
lane.
WARNING: The system is not a
crash warning or avoidance system.
WARNING: Do not use the system
with a snow plow blade installed.
The system adjusts your vehicle speed to
maintain the set gap between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane.
You can select four gap settings.
The system uses a radar sensor that
projects a beam directly in front of your
vehicle.
E262918
104
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
The adaptive cruise controls are on the
steering wheel.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On
E265296
Press and release the button.
E144529
The indicator, current gap setting
and set speed appear in the
information display.
E233874
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
Drive to your preferred speed.
Press and release either button.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
E233874
A vehicle graphic illuminates if there is a
vehicle detected in front of you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the speedometer may vary slightly
from the set speed displayed in the
information display.
Following a Vehicle
WARNING: When following a
vehicle that is braking, your vehicle does
not always decelerate quickly enough to
avoid a crash without driver intervention.
Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system only warns
of vehicles detected by the radar sensor.
In some cases there may be no warning
or a delayed warning. Apply the brakes
when necessary. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
Note: When you are following a vehicle and
you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small
temporary acceleration to help you pass.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
105
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap distance. A
vehicle graphic illuminates in the
instrument cluster.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out
of the lane you are in.
• Your vehicle speed falls below 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• You set a new gap distance.
The system applies the brakes to slow your
vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance
from the vehicle in front. The system only
applies limited braking. You can override
the system by applying the brakes.
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level is not sufficient, an audible
warning sounds, a message appears in the
information display and an indicator
flashes when the system continues to
brake. Take immediate action.
Setting the Gap Distance
You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front by pressing the gap control.
E263697
Press and release to decrease
the gap distance.
E263696
Press and release to increase the
gap distance.
E233874
The selected gap appears in the
information display as shown by the bars
in the image.
Note: The gap setting is time dependent
and therefore the distance adjusts with your
vehicle speed.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
Dynamic
Behavior
Distance GapGraphic
Display,
Bars Indic-
ated
Between
Vehicles
Sport.Closest.1
Normal.Close.2
Normal.Medium.3
Comfort.Far.4
Each time you switch the system on, it
selects the last chosen gap setting.
106
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Overriding the Set Speed
WARNING: If you override the
system by pressing the accelerator
pedal, it does not automatically apply
the brakes to maintain a gap from any
vehicle ahead.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you
override the set speed and gap distance.
E144529
Use the accelerator pedal
normally to intentionally exceed
the set speed limit.
When you override the system, the green
indicator light illuminates and the vehicle
image does not appear in the information
display.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
Changing the Set Speed
Press and release to increase the
set speed in small increments.
Press and release to decrease
the set speed in small
increments.
Press and hold either button to change the
set speed in large increments. Release the
button when you reach your preferred
speed.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
Canceling the Set Speed
E265298
Press and release the button or
tap the brake pedal.
The set speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release the button.
Your vehicle speed returns to the
previously set speed and gap setting. The
set speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
Automatic Cancellation
The system is not functional at vehicle
speeds below 12 mph (20 km/h). An
audible alarm sounds and the automatic
braking releases if the vehicle drops below
this speed.
Automatic cancellation can also occur
when:
• The tires lose traction.
• You apply the parking brake.
Hilly Condition and Trailer Tow
Usage
You should select a lower gear when the
system is active in situations such as
prolonged downhill driving on steep
grades, for example in mountainous areas.
The system needs additional engine
braking in these situations to reduce the
load on the vehicle’s regular brake system
to prevent it from overheating.
Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for
an extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again after the brakes cool.
Note: When towing with adaptive cruise
control, switch on Tow/Haul Mode and
Diesel Engine Brake.
107
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Note: Tow/Haul mode increases the time
gaps and allows more distance for braking.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off
E265297
Press and release the button
when the system is in standby
mode, or switch the ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed and gap
setting when you switch the system off.
Detection Issues
WARNING: On rare occasions,
detection issues can occur due to the
road infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these
cases, the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening,
if required.
WARNING: If the system
malfunctions, have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
The radar sensor has a limited field of view.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect
a vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle graphic does
not illuminate if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front of you.
E71621
Detection issues can occur:
When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
A
With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.
B
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.
C
In these cases, the system may brake late
or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and
take action when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the
radar-sensing zone may change. This could
cause missed or false vehicle detection.
108
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Optimal system performance requires a
clear view of the road by the
windshield-mounted camera.
Optimal performance may not occur if:
• The camera is blocked.
• There is poor visibility or lighting
conditions.
• There are bad weather conditions.
System Not Available
Conditions that can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
E243054
The camera is mounted on the windshield
behind the interior mirror.
E183741
A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The
sensor is in the lower grille. The system
cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does
not function when something blocks the
sensor.
Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is
behind a fascia panel.
Keep the front of your vehicle free of dirt,
metal badges or objects. Vehicle front
protectors and aftermarket lights may also
block the sensor.
Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying:
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar is dirty or
obstructed.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.
The surface of the radar is clean but the
message remains in the display.
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the
radar signals.
109
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
ActionCause
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Water, snow or ice on the surface of the
road may interfere with the radar signals.
Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise
control.
You are in a desert or remote area with no
other vehicles and no roadside objects.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no
actual block. A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you restart your
vehicle.
Switching to Normal Cruise
Control
WARNING: Normal cruise control
will not brake when your vehicle is
approaching slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have selected
and apply the brakes when necessary.
E71340
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The gap
setting does not display, and the system
does not respond to lead vehicles.
Automatic braking remains active to
maintain set speed.
You can change from adaptive cruise
control to normal cruise control through
the information display.
110
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
DRIVER ALERT (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The system is designed
to aid the driver. It is not intended to
replace your attention and judgment.
You are still responsible to drive with due
care and attention.
WARNING: At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening,
if required. Failure to take care may result
in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system may not
function if the sensor is blocked.
WARNING: Take regular rest
breaks if you feel tired. Do not wait for
the system to warn you.
WARNING: Certain driving styles
may result in the system warning you
even if you are not feeling tired.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all
limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the
road lane markings.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by
us.
Note: Keep the windshield free from
obstructions. For example, bird droppings,
insects and snow or ice.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.
Note: The system remembers the last
setting when you start your vehicle, unless
a MyKey™ is detected.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
activates at speeds above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
E249505
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system will alert you using
a chime and a message in the information
display.
Using Driver Alert
Switching the system on and off
You may switch the system on or off
through the information display by
selecting Settings then Driver Assist then
Driver Alert in the menu. When activated,
the system will monitor your alertness level
based upon your driving behavior in relation
to the lane markings, and other factors.
111
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Driving Aids
System Warnings
Note: The system will not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
The warning system is in two stages. At
first the system issues a temporary warning
that you need to take a rest. This message
will only appear for a short time. If the
system detects further reduction in driving
alertness, another warning may be issued
which will remain in the information display
for a longer time. Press OK on the steering
wheel control to clear the warning. When
active the system will run automatically in
the background and only issue a warning
if required.
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Always drive with due
care and attention when using and
operating the controls and features on
your vehicle.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all
limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the
road lane markings.
WARNING: The sensor may
incorrectly track lane markings as other
structures or objects. This can result in
a false or missed warning.
WARNING: Large contrasts in
outside lighting can limit sensor
performance.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from
obstruction.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by
us.
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking at a
speed above 40 mph (64 km/h).
Note: The system may not function with a
blocked camera, or if the windshield is
damaged or dirty.
112
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Driving Aids
E249505
When you switch the system on and it
detects an unintentional drift out of your
lane is likely to occur, the system notifies
or assists you to stay in your lane through
the steering system and information
display. The system provides a warning by
an audible tone.
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey,
it defaults to on and the mode is set to alert.
Note: If a MyKey is detected, pressing the
button does not affect the on or off status
of the system. You can only change the
mode and sensitivity settings.
E173233
Press the button to switch the
system on or off. The button is
above the audio unit or on the
center console.
System Settings
The system sensitivity and intensity can
be adjusted through the display screen.
See General Information (page 63). The
system remembers the last selection. You
do not need to readjust the setting each
time you turn on your vehicle.
Sensitivity: This setting allows you to
select where in the lane a warning is
provided. Increasing the sensitivity setting
moves the warning zones in closer to your
vehicle.
E165517
NormalA
IncreasedB
Note: The alert diagram illustrates general
zone coverage. It does not provide exact
zone parameters.
System Display
E233874
When you switch on the system, a graphic
with lane markings appears in the display
screen.
Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may
still display if adaptive cruise control is
enabled.
113
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Driving Aids
While the system is on, the color of the
lane markings change to indicate the
system status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is
temporarily unable to provide a warning
on the indicated side(s). This may be
because:
• Your vehicle is below the activation
speed.
• The direction indicator is active.
• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
• The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
• The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental, traffic or vehicle
conditions. For example, significant sun
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or
fog, following a large vehicle that is
blocking or shadowing the lane or poor
headlamp illumination.
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is
available or ready to provide a warning on
the indicated side(s).
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
You can temporarily disable the system at
any time by doing the following:
• Quick braking.
• Fast acceleration.
• Using your direction indicator.
• Evasive steering maneuver.
• Driving too close to the lane markings.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Your vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature.
The sun is shining directly into the camera lens.
A quick intentional lane change has occurred.
Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings.
Driving at high speeds in curves.
The last feature activation occurred a short time ago.
Ambiguous lane markings, for example in construction zones.
Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light.
Sudden offset in lane markings.
ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.
There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield.
114
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you.
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa.
There is standing water on the road.
Faint lane markings, for example partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads.
Lane width is too narrow or too wide.
The camera has not been calibrated after a windshield replacement.
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads.
Vehicle accessories are blocking the camera, for example a snow plow.
STEERING
Hydraulic Power Steering
To help prevent damage to the power
steering system:
• Do not hold the steering wheel at its
furthest turning points for more than
three to five seconds when the engine
is running.
• Avoid continuously steering back and
forth with elevated engine RPM as this
may overheat the system. If trying to
free a stuck vehicle, pause between
attempts to allow the power steering
system to cool or seek assistance.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers
allow the system to cool.
• Do not operate the vehicle if the power
steering pump fluid level is below the
MIN mark on the reservoir.
• Some noise is normal during operation.
If excessive, check for low power
steering pump fluid level before
seeking service by your dealer.
• Heavy or uneven efforts may be caused
by low power steering fluid. Check for
low power steering pump fluid level
before seeking service by your dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering pump
reservoir above the MAX mark on the
reservoir, as this may result in leaks
from the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down
or if you switch the engine off, you can
steer the vehicle manually, but it takes
more effort.
If you have any steering components
serviced or replaced, install new fasteners.
Many fasteners have coatings with thread
adhesive, or have prevailing torque
features you cannot reuse. Do not reuse a
bolt or nut. Torque fasteners to
specifications.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• An improperly inflated tire.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension
components.
115
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Driving Aids
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system does not
detect vehicles that are driving in a
different direction, pedestrians at night,
cyclists or animals. Apply the brakes
when necessary. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: The system does not
operate during hard acceleration or
steering. Failure to take care may lead
to a crash or personal injury.
WARNING: The system may fail or
operate with reduced function during
cold and severe weather conditions.
Snow, ice, rain, spray and fog can
adversely affect the system. Keep the
front camera and radar free of snow and
ice. Failure to take care may result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Some situations and
objects prevent hazard detection. For
example low or direct sunlight, inclement
weather, unconventional vehicle types,
and pedestrians. Apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Take additional care if
your vehicle is heavily loaded or you are
towing a trailer. These conditions could
result in reduced performance of this
system. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system cannot
help prevent all crashes. Do not rely on
this system to replace driver judgment
and the need to maintain a safe distance
and speed.
Using the Pre-Collision Assist
System
The Pre-Collision Assist system is active
at speeds above approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h)
E156130
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching
another stationary vehicle or a vehicle
traveling in the same direction as yours,
the system provides three levels of
functionality:
1. Alert
2. Brake Support
3. Active Braking
116
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Driving Aids
E255268
Alert: When active, a flashing visual
warning appears and an audible warning
tone sounds.
Brake Support: The system is designed
to help reduce the impact speed by
preparing the brakes for rapid braking. The
system does not automatically apply the
brakes. If you press the brake pedal, the
system could apply additional braking up
to maximum braking force, even if you
lightly press the brake pedal.
Active Braking: Active braking may
activate if the system determines that a
collision is imminent. The system may help
the driver reduce impact damage or avoid
the crash completely.
Note: If you perceive Pre-Collision Assist
alerts as being too frequent or disturbing,
then you can reduce the alert sensitivity,
though the manufacturer recommends
using the highest sensitivity setting where
possible. Setting lower sensitivity would
lead to fewer and later system warnings.
Distance Indication and Alert
Distance Indication and Alert is a function
that provides the driver with a graphical
indication of the time gap to other
preceding vehicles traveling in the same
direction. The Distance Indication and Alert
screen in the display screen shows one of
the graphics that follow.
E254791
If the time gap to a preceding vehicle is
small, a red visual indication displays.
Note: Distance Indication and Alert
deactivates and the graphics do not display
when Adaptive Cruise Control is active.
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings
You can adjust the following settings by
using the information display controls. See
General Information (page 63).
• You can change Alert and Distance
Alert sensitivity to one of three possible
settings.
• You can switch Distance Indication and
Alert on or off.
• If required, you can switch Active
Braking on or off.
• If required, you can switch the entire
Pre-Collision Assist feature on or off.
Note: Active braking automatically turns
on every time you switch the ignition on.
117
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: We recommend that you switch the
system off if you install a snow plow or
similar object in such a way that it may
block the radar sensor. Your vehicle
remembers the selected setting across key
cycles.
Blocked Sensors
E310549
Camera.1
Radar sensor.2
If a message regarding a blocked sensor
or camera appears in the information
display, the radar signals or camera images
are obstructed. With a blocked sensor or
camera, the Pre-Collision Assist system
may not function, or performance may
reduce. The following table lists possible
causes and actions for when this message
displays.
Camera Troubleshooting
ActionCause
Clean the outside of the windshield in front
of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera is
dirty or obstructed in some way.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the camera to detect that there
is no obstruction.
The windshield in front of the camera is
clean but the message remains in the
display screen.
118
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Radar Troubleshooting
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or obstructed in some way.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that there
is no obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean
but the message remains in the display
screen.
The Pre-Collision Assist system is tempor-
arily disabled. Pre-Collision Assist automat-
ically reactivates a short time after the
weather conditions improve.
Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog is interfering
with the radar signals.
The Pre-Collision Assist system is tempor-
arily disabled. Pre-Collision Assist automat-
ically reactivates a short time after the
weather conditions improve.
Swirling water or snow or ice on the surface
of the road may interfere with the radar
signals.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the
radar checked for proper coverage and
operation.
Radar is out of alignment due to a front end
impact.
Note: Proper system operation requires a
clear view of the road by the camera. Have
any windshield damage in the area of the
camera's field of view repaired.
Note: If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs and your vehicle
has a radar sensor, the radar sensing zone
may change. This could cause missed or
false vehicle detections. Contact an
authorized dealer to have the radar checked
for proper coverage and operation.
Note: If your vehicle detects excessive heat
at the camera or a potential misalignment
condition, a message may display in the
information display indicating temporary
sensor unavailability. When operational
conditions are correct, the message
deactivates. For example, when the ambient
temperature around the sensor decreases
or the sensor automatically recalibrates
successfully.
119
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Driving Aids
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section guides you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer, or both. Keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle provides maximum return
of vehicle design performance.
Before you load your vehicle,
become familiar with the
following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight rating, with
or without a trailer, from the
vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.
Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:
E198719
Payload
Payload is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that your
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle appears
on the Tire and Loading label. The
label is either on the B-pillar or the
edge of the driver door. Vehicles
exported outside the US and
Canada may not have a tire and
loading label. Look for “The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label
120
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Load Carrying
is the maximum payload for your
vehicle as built by the assembly
plant. If you install any additional
equipment on your vehicle, you
must determine the new payload.
Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire and Loading label.
When towing, trailer tongue
weight or king pin weight is also
part of payload.
WARNING: The
appropriate loading capacity of
your vehicle can be limited either
by volume capacity (how much
space is available) or by payload
capacity (how much weight the
vehicle should carry). Once you
have reached the maximum
payload of your vehicle, do not
add more cargo, even if there is
space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating)
GAWR is the maximum allowable
weight that a single axle (front or
rear) can carry. These numbers
are on the Safety Compliance
Certification label. The label is
located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its Gross Axle
Weight Rating.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
GVWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle.
This includes all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo.
It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
The label is located on the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver
seating position.
The gross vehicle weight must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating.
Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example:
E198828
121
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Load Carrying
WARNING: Exceeding the
Safety Compliance Certification
label vehicle weight limits can
adversely affect the
performance and handling of
your vehicle, cause vehicle
damage and can result in the
loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight
Maximum loaded trailer weight is
the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can
tow. Consult an authorized dealer
(or the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide available at an authorized
dealer) for more detailed
information.
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating)
GCWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the
loaded trailer, including all cargo
and passengers, that the vehicle
can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle.
The gross combined weight must
never exceed the Gross Combined
Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not exceed
the GVWR or the GAWR
specified on the certification
label.
WARNING: Do not use
replacement tires with lower
load carrying capacities than the
original tires because they may
lower your vehicle's GVWR and
GAWR limitations. Replacement
tires with a higher limit than the
original tires do not increase the
GVWR and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any
vehicle weight rating can
adversely affect the
performance and handling of
your vehicle, cause vehicle
damage and can result in the
loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
122
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Load Carrying
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Helpful examples for calculating
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and
one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 -
(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
123
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Load Carrying
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load
calculation would be:1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the front or the rear gross axle
weight rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
Special Loading Instructions
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING: When loading
the roof racks, we recommend
you evenly distribute the load,
as well as maintain a low center
of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with
higher centers of gravity, may
handle differently than unloaded
vehicles. Take extra precautions,
such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance,
when driving a heavily loaded
vehicle.
124
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING: Do not exceed
the GVWR or the GAWR
specified on the certification
label.
WARNING: Towing trailers
beyond the maximum
recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of your
vehicle and could result in engine
damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and personal injury.
Your vehicle may have electrical
items, for example fuses or relays,
related to towing. See Fuses
(page 151).
Your vehicle's load capacity
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
loading your vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an extra
load on your vehicle's engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires
and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a draw bar with the
correct rise or drop. When both
the loaded vehicle and trailer
are connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
or shudder may be present due to
the increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
correct trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is
located in another chapter of this
Owner's Manual. See Load Limit
(page 120). You can also find the
information in the RV & Trailer
Towing Guide. See an authorized
dealer.
125
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Towing
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Make sure to take into
consideration the trailer frontal
area. Vehicles that have the Trailer
Tow Package or the Heavy Duty
Payload Package should not
exceed a 60 ft² (5.6 m²) trailer
frontal area.
Note: Exceeding this limitation
may significantly reduce the
performance of your towing
vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a
low aerodynamic drag and rounded
front design helps optimize
performance and fuel economy.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight
by 2% per 1,000 ft (300 m)
starting at the 1,000 ft (300 m)
elevation point.
Note: Certain states require
electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. Be sure to
check state regulations for this
specified weight. Your vehicle's
electrical system may not include
the wiring connector needed to
activate electric trailer brakes if the
trailer exceeds this specified
weight.
E-350 Cutaway
Maximum
Gross Combina-
tion Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Wheelbase
Rear Axle
Option
Engine
13,000 lb
(5,897 kg)
4.10
138 in (3.5 m)
Single Rear
Wheel
7.3L
DVCT
4.56
18,500 lb
(8,391 kg)
4.10
138 in (3.5 m)
Single Rear
Wheel
7.3L
DEVCT
4.56
13,000 lb
(5,897 kg)
4.10
138 in (3.5 m)
Dual Rear
Wheel
7.3L
DVCT
17,000 lb
(7,711 kg)
4.56
18,500 lb
(8,391 kg)
4.10
138 in (3.5 m)
Dual Rear
Wheel
7.3L
DEVCT
4.56
126
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Towing
E-350 Cutaway
Maximum
Gross Combina-
tion Weight
Rating
Rear Axle
Ratio
Wheelbase
Rear Axle
Option
Engine
13,000 lb
(5,897 kg)
4.10
158 in (4.01 m)
Single Rear
Wheel
7.3L
DVCT
4.56
18,500 lb
(8,391 kg)
4.10
158 in (4.01 m)
Single Rear
Wheel
7.3L
DEVCT
4.56
13,000 lb
(5,897 kg)
4.10
158 in (4.01 m)
Dual Rear
Wheel
7.3L
DVCT
17,000 lb
(7,711 kg)
4.56
18,500 lb
(8,391 kg)
4.10
158 in (4.01 m)
Dual Rear
Wheel
7.3L
DEVCT
4.56
13,000 lb
(5,897 kg)
4.10
176 in (4.47 m)
Dual Rear
Wheel
7.3LDVCT
17,000 lb
(7,711 kg)
4.56
18,500 lb
(8,391 kg)
4.10
176 in (4.47 m)
Dual Rear
Wheel
7.3L
DEVCT
4.56
127
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Towing
E-350 Stripped Chassis
Maximum
GCWR
Rear Axle
Ratio
Wheelbase
Length
Rear Axle
Option
Engine
13,000 lb
(5,897 kg)
4.10
138 in (3.5 m)
Dual Rear
Wheel
7.3L
DVCT
17,000 lb
(7,711 kg)
4.56
18,500 lb
(8,391 kg)
4.10
138 in (3.5 m)
Dual Rear
Wheel
7.3L
DEVCT
4.56
13,000 lb
(5,897 kg)
4.10
158 in (4.01 m)
Dual Rear
Wheel
7.3L
DVCT
17,000 lb
(7,711 kg)
4.56
18,500 lb
(8,391 kg)
4.10
158 in (4.01 m)
Dual Rear
Wheel
7.3L
DEVCT
4.56
13,000 lb
(5,897 kg)
4.10
176 in (4.47 m)
Dual Rear
Wheel
7.3L
DVCT
17,000 lb
(7,711 kg)
4.56
18,500 lb
(8,391 kg)
4.10
176 in (4.47 m)
Dual Rear
Wheel
7.3L
DEVCT
4.56
128
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Towing
E-450 Cutaway
Maximum
GCWR
Rear Axle
Ratio
Wheelbase
Length
Rear Axle
Option
Engine
18,000 lb
(8,165 kg)
4.56158 in (4.01 m)
Dual Rear
Wheel
7.3L
DVCT
22,000 lb
(9,979 kg)
4.56158 in (4.01 m)
Dual Rear
Wheel
7.3L
DEVCT
18,000 lb
(8,165 kg)
4.56176 in (4.47 m)
Dual Rear
Wheel
7.3L
DVCT
22,000 lb
(9,979 kg)
4.56176 in (4.47 m)
Dual Rear
Wheel
7.3L
DEVCT
E-450 Stripped Chassis
Maximum
GCWR
Rear Axle
Ratio
Wheelbase
Length
Rear Axle
Option
Engine
18,000 lb
(8,165 kg)
4.56158 in (4.01 m)
Dual Rear
Wheel
7.3L
DVCT
22,000 lb
(9,979 kg)
4.56158 in (4.01 m)
Dual Rear
Wheel
7.3L
DEVCT
18,000 lb
(8,165 kg)
4.56176 in (4.47 m)
Dual Rear
Wheel
7.3L
DVCT
22,000 lb
(9,979 kg)
4.56176 in (4.47 m)
Dual Rear
Wheel
7.3L
DEVCT
Calculating the Maximum
Loaded Trailer Weight for Your
Vehicle
1. Start with the gross combined
weight rating for your vehicle
model and axle ratio. See the
previous charts.
2. Subtract all the following that
apply to your vehicle:
• Vehicle curb weight.
• Hitch hardware weight, such as
a draw bar, ball, locks or weight
distributing hardware.
• Driver weight.
129
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Towing
• The weight of all passengers.
• Payload, cargo and luggage
weight.
• Aftermarket equipment weight.
The maximum loaded trailer
weight is this value or 10,000 lb
(4,536 kg), whichever is less.
Note: Your vehicle's payload
should include the trailer tongue
load. Reduce the total payload by
the final trailer tongue weight.
Note: Consult an authorized dealer
to determine the maximum trailer
weight allowed for your vehicle if
you are not sure.
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment
specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 250).
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.
See Load limits in the Load Carrying
chapter for load specification terms found
on the tire label and Safety Compliance
label and instructions on calculating your
vehicle's load.
Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Trailer Towing Connector
E163167
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions. Some seven-position
connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the proper wiring
connector and works correctly with your
vehicle.
FunctionColor
Left turn signal and stop lampYellow
Ground (-)White
Electric brakesBlue
Right turn signal and stop
lamp
Green
Battery (+)Orange
Running lightsBrown
Reverse lightsGrey
130
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Towing
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle. You
must distribute the load in your trailer so
that 10-15% of the total weight of the
trailer is on the tongue.
Weight-distributing Hitches
WARNING: Do not adjust the spring
bars so that your vehicle's rear bumper
is higher than before attaching the trailer.
Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may
cause unpredictable handling, and could
result in serious personal injury.
When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park the loaded vehicle, without the
trailer, on a level surface.
2. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.
3. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
4. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars so that the
height of your vehicle's front wheel
opening on the fender is approximately
half the way down from H2, toward H1.
6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly
nose down toward your vehicle. If not,
adjust the ball height accordingly and
repeat Steps 2-6.
When the trailer is level or slightly nose
down toward the vehicle:
• Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
• Check that the trailer tongue securely
attaches and locks onto the hitch.
• Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.
Safety Chains
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the
frame or hook retainers of your vehicle
hitch.
To connect the safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING: Do not connect a
trailer's hydraulic brake system directly
to your vehicle's brake system. Your
vehicle may not have enough braking
power and your chances of having a
collision greatly increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them to
the manufacturer's specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems
are required for safe control of towed
vehicles and trailers weighing more
than 1500 lb (680 kg) when loaded.
131
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Towing
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Use the integrated
trailer brake controller to properly adjust
the trailer brakes and check all
connections before towing a trailer.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
Note: The Ford trailer brake controller has
been verified to be compatible with trailers
having electric-actuated drum brakes (one
to four axles) and electric-over-hydraulic
brakes. It will not activate hydraulic
surge-style trailer brakes. It is the
responsibility of the customer to ensure that
the trailer brakes are adjusted appropriately,
functioning normally and all electric
connections are properly made.
E183395
When used properly, the trailer brake
controller assists in smooth and effective
trailer braking by powering the trailer’s
electric or electric-over-hydraulic brakes
with a proportional output based on the
towing vehicle’s brake pressure.
The controller user interface consists of
the following:
A: + and - (Gain adjustment buttons):
Pressing these buttons adjusts the
controller's power output to the trailer
brakes in 0.5 increments. You can increase
the gain setting to 10.0 (maximum trailer
braking) or decrease it to 0 (no trailer
braking). The gain setting displays in the
message center.
The controller shows gain setting, output
bar graph, and trailer connectivity status
in the information display. They appear in
the information display as follows:
• Trailer Brake Controller Gain (without
trailer connected): Shows the current
gain setting during a given ignition cycle
and when adjusting the gain. This also
displays if you use the manual control
lever or make gain adjustments with
no trailer connected.
• Trailer Brake Controller Gain Output:
Displays when you push your vehicle's
brake pedal, or upon use of the manual
control. Bar indicators illuminate in the
information display to indicate the
amount of power going to the trailer
brakes relative to the brake pedal or
manual control input. One bar indicates
the least amount of output; six bars
indicate maximum output.
• Trailer Connected: Displays when the
system senses a correct trailer wiring
connection (a trailer with electric trailer
brakes) during a given ignition cycle.
• Trailer Disconnected: Displays,
accompanied by a single audible time,
when the system senses a trailer
connection and then a disconnection,
either intentional or unintentional,
during a given ignition cycle. It also
displays if a truck or trailer-wiring fault
occurs causing the trailer to appear
disconnected. This message can also
display if you use the manual control
lever without a trailer connected.
132
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Towing
B: Manual control lever: Slide the control
lever to the left to switch on the trailer's
electric brakes independent of the tow
vehicle's. See the following Procedure for
Adjusting Gain section for instructions
on proper use of this feature. If you use the
manual control while the brake is also
applied, the greater of the two inputs
determines the power sent to the trailer
brakes.
• Stop lamps: Using the manual control
lever illuminates both the trailer brake
lamps and your vehicle brake lamps
except the center high-mount stop
lamp, if you make the proper electrical
connection to the trailer. Pressing your
vehicle brake pedal also illuminates
both trailer and vehicle brake lamps.
Procedure for Adjusting Gain
Note: Only perform this procedure in a
traffic-free environment at speeds of
approximately 20-25 mph (30-40 km/h).
The gain setting sets the trailer brake
controller for the specific towing condition.
You should change the setting as towing
conditions change. Changes to towing
conditions include trailer load, vehicle load,
road conditions and weather.
The gain should be set to provide the
maximum trailer braking assistance while
making sure the trailer wheels do not lock
when using the brakes. Locked trailer
wheels may lead to trailer instability.
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally
and properly adjusted. See your trailer
dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the
electrical connections according to the
trailer manufacturer's instructions.
3. When you plug in a trailer with electric
or electric-over-hydraulic brakes, a
message confirming connection
appears in the information display.
4. Use the gain adjustment (+ and -)
buttons to increase or decrease the
gain setting to the desired starting
point. A gain setting of 6.0 is a good
starting point for heavier loads.
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the
trailer on a dry, level surface at a speed
of 20-25 mph (30-40 km/h) and
squeeze the manual control lever
completely.
6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicated
by squealing tires, reduce the gain
setting. If the trailer wheels turn freely,
increase the gain setting. Repeat Steps
5 and 6 until the gain setting is at a
point just below trailer wheel lock-up.
If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel
lock-up may not be attainable even
with the maximum gain setting of 10.
Explanation of Information Display
Warning Messages
Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose
the trailer brake controller to determine
exactly which trailer fault has occurred.
However, your Ford warranty does not cover
this diagnosis if the fault is with the trailer.
A message indicating a trailer brake
module fault may display in response to
faults sensed by the trailer brake controller,
accompanied by a single tone. If this
message appears, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible for diagnosis
and repair. The controller may still
function, but performance may be
degraded.
A message indicating a trailer wiring fault
may display when there is a short circuit
on the electric brake output wire. If this
message displays, accompanied by a
single tone, with no trailer connected, the
problem is with your vehicle wiring
between the trailer brake controller and
the 7-pin connector at the bumper. If the
message only displays with a trailer
connected, the problem is with the trailer
133
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Towing
wiring. Consult your trailer dealer for
assistance. This can be a short to ground
(such as a chaffed wire), short to voltage
(such as a pulled pin on trailer emergency
breakaway battery) or the trailer brakes
may be drawing too much current.
Points to Remember
Note: Do not attempt removal of the trailer
brake controller without consulting the
Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may
result.
• Adjust gain setting before using the
trailer brake controller for the first time.
• Adjust gain setting, using the procedure
above, whenever road, weather and
trailer or vehicle loading conditions
change from when the gain was initially
set.
• Only use the manual control lever for
proper adjustment of the gain during
trailer setup. Misuse, such as
application during trailer sway, could
cause instability of trailer or tow
vehicle.
• Avoid towing in adverse weather
conditions. The trailer brake controller
does not provide anti-lock control of
the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can
lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting
in reduced stability of trailer and tow
vehicle.
• The trailer brake controller is equipped
with a feature that reduces output at
vehicle speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h)
so trailer and vehicle braking is not jerky
or harsh. This feature is only available
when applying the brakes using your
vehicle's brake pedal, not the
controller.
• The controller interacts with the brake
control system and powertrain control
system of your vehicle to provide the
best performance on different road
conditions.
• Your vehicle's brake system and the
trailer brake system work
independently of each other. Changing
the gain setting on the controller does
not affect the operation of your
vehicle's brakes whether you attach a
trailer or not.
• When you switch the engine off, the
controller output is disabled and the
display and module shut down. The
controller module and display turn on
when you switch the ignition on.
• The trailer brake controller is only a
factory-installed or dealer-installed
item. Ford is not responsible for
warranty or performance of the
controller due to misuse or customer
installation.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING: Never connect any
trailer lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail
lamp wiring; this may damage the
electrical system resulting in fire. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible for assistance in proper trailer
tow wiring installation. Additional
electrical equipment may be required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, direction indicators and hazard lights
are working.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other
obstacles.
134
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Towing
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi
(800 km).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
• When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in position P to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
• Switch off the speed control with
heavy loads or in hilly terrain. The
speed control may turn off
automatically when you are towing on
long, steep grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
• If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac with RSC, this system
may turn on during typical cornering
maneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer.
This is normal. Turning the corner at a
slower speed while towing may reduce
this tendency.
• If you are towing a trailer frequently in
hot weather, hilly conditions, at the
gross combined weight rating (or any
combination of these factors), consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic
gear lubricant. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 219).
• Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
position P.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels. (Chocks not
included with vehicle.)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
temporary or conventional spare tire. A
"temporary" spare tire is different in size
(diameter or width), tread-type
(All-Season or All Terrain) or is from a
different manufacturer than the road tires
on your vehicle. Consult information on the
tire label or Safety Compliance label for
limitations when using.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom
edge of the rear bumper.
135
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Towing
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions and
reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
the rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear
axle lubricant, which is not normally
checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS
Emergency Towing
WARNING: If your vehicle has a
steering wheel lock make sure the
ignition is in the accessory or on position
when being towed.
You can flat-tow (all wheels on the
ground, regardless of the powertrain or
transmission configuration) your disabled
vehicle (without access to wheel dollies
or vehicle transport trailer) under the
following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward so you
tow it in a forward direction.
• You shift into Neutral (N). If you cannot
shift into Neutral (N), you may need to
override the transmission. See
Transmission (page 92).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 70).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example
of recreational towing would be towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. These
guidelines are to make sure you do not
damage the transmission during towing.
Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels
on the ground, as vehicle or transmission
damage may occur. It is recommended to
tow your vehicle with all four wheels off
the ground, for example when using a
vehicle transport trailer. Otherwise, you
cannot tow your vehicle.
136
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Towing
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 mi (480 km). During
this time, your vehicle may exhibit some
unusual driving characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first
1,000 mi (1,600 km). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the
gears early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1,000 mi
(1,600 km).
REDUCED ENGINE
PERFORMANCE
WARNING: If you continue to drive
your vehicle when the engine is
overheating, the engine could stop
without warning. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle.
If the engine coolant temperature gauge
needle moves to the upper limit position,
the engine is overheating. See Gauges
(page 57).
You must only drive your vehicle for a short
distance if the engine overheats. The
distance you can travel depends on
ambient temperature, vehicle load and
terrain. The engine continues to operate
with limited power for a short period of
time.
If the engine temperature continues to rise,
the fuel supply to the engine reduces. The
air conditioning switches off and the engine
cooling fan operates continually.
1. Gradually reduce your speed and stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
2. Immediately switch the engine off to
prevent severe engine damage.
3. Wait for the engine to cool down.
4. Check the coolant level. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 165).
5. Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things
such as how you drive, the conditions you
drive under and how you maintain your
vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that
may improve your fuel economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving (When running
errands, go to the furthest destination
first and then work your way back
home).
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds.
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
There are also some things you may want
to avoid doing because they reduce your
fuel economy:
• Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.
• Avoid revving the engine before turning
off the car.
• Avoid long idle periods.
• Do not warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
137
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Driving Hints
• Reduce the use of air conditioning and
heat.
• Avoid using speed control in hilly
terrain.
• Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving.
• Avoid carrying unnecessary weight.
• Avoid adding particular accessories to
your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks).
• Avoid driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING: Do not drive through
flowing or deep water as you may lose
control of your vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water,
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the wheel
hubs.
E176913
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the exterior lights work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Use a floor mat
designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle that does not obstruct the pedal
area. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Pedals that cannot
move freely can cause loss of vehicle
control and increase the risk of serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Secure the floor mat
to both retention devices so that it
cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the pedals. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not place additional
floor mats or any other covering on top
of the original floor mats. This could
result in the floor mat interfering with the
operation of the pedals. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
138
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Driving Hints
WARNING: Always make sure that
objects cannot fall into the driver foot
well while your vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped
under the pedals causing a loss of
vehicle control.
E142666
To install the floor mats, position the floor
mat eyelet over the retention post and
press down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to
make sure they are secure.
139
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The service is available:
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
• For the coverage period supplied with
your vehicle.
Roadside Assistance covers:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L)
of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery
service to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
authorized dealer. If a member
requests a tow to an authorized dealer
that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
• Roadside Assistance includes up to
$200 for a towed trailer if the disabled
eligible vehicle requires service at the
nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
vehicle is operational but the trailer is
not, then the trailer does not qualify for
any roadside services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is in
the Owner's Manual kit.
United States vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.
140
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary
roadside assistance program. This program
is eligible within Canada or the continental
United States.
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle. Canadian roadside
coverage and benefits may differ from the
U.S. coverage.
If you require more information, please call
us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit
our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHERS
Note: If used when the vehicle is not
running, the battery loses charge. As a result,
there may be insufficient power to restart
your vehicle.
E304635
The hazard flasher control is located on
the instrument panel. Use it when your
vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
• Press the flasher control and all front
and rear direction indicators flash.
• Press the flasher control again to
switch them off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING: If your vehicle has been
involved in a crash, have the fuel system
checked. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or
death.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, your vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once your vehicle determines that the
systems are safe, your vehicle allows you to
restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
a qualified technician.
The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of
fuel to the engine in the event of a
moderate to severe crash. Not every
impact causes a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a crash,
you may restart your vehicle.
If your vehicle has a key system:
1. Turn key to the off position.
2. Turn key to the start position.
3. Turn key to the off position.
4. Turn key to the on position.
5. The fuel pump is now re-enabled.
141
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can
cause personal injury. Therefore, do not
allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always
shield your face and protect your eyes.
Always provide correct ventilation.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain
sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,
eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when
working near the battery to protect
against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin
or eyes, flush immediately with water for
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed,
call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Use only adequately
sized cables with insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle
with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not connect the
negative jumper cable to any other part
of your vehicle. Use the ground point.
WARNING: Make sure that the
cables are clear of any moving parts and
fuel delivery system parts.
E310550
Note: See the above image for your
vehicle's assigned ground connection point.
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to the ground
connection point.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
142
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
4
1
3
2
E142665
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: Block the wheels to
help prevent the vehicle from moving.
WARNING: Unexpected and
possibly sudden vehicle movement may
occur if you do not take these
precautions.
E143886
143
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or,
if you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, your roadside
assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle
damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or
by any other means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck
operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your two-wheel
drive vehicle towed with the front wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and the
rear wheels off the ground.
144
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
If your vehicle is configured as a
motorhome please call 1-800-444-3311
for support.
Additional information and resources are
available online:
Website
www.owner.ford.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Ford Extended Service Plans.
• Ford Genuine Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Website
www.ford.ca
Twitter
@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
@FordServiceQC (Quebec)
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
145
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’ s current odometer reading.
In some states within the United States,
you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your
state's warranty laws, and Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt.
Additionally, in some states within the
United States, a consumer has the option
of submitting a warranty dispute to the
BBB Auto Line before taking action under
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to
the extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever
occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
146
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).
You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies
not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
For additional information refer to the
Better Business Bureau website.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
147
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel or petrol/gas engines or the proper
sulfur fuel for diesel engines.
If you cannot find the proper fuel
recommended for your vehicle, contact
our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of improper fuels in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking or
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by use
of improper fuel. Using improper fuels may
also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands
and/or Puerto Rico, Central America, the
Caribbean, and Israel and the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact the corresponding Ford Customer
Assistance Center:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Centers in:
E-mailFaxPhone
Customer Relation-
ship Center
apemcrc@ford.comN/AN/AAsia Pacific
expcac@ford.com-+1 313 594 4857
Caribbean and
Central America
menacac@ford.com971 4 3327 266
Ford
Middle East
80004443673
Lincoln
80004441067
UAE
80004441066
Saudi Arabia
8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell
phone users in Saudi
800850078
Kuwait
22280384
148
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
E-mailFaxPhone
Customer Relation-
ship Center
nafcrc@ford.comN/AN/ANorth Africa
prcac@ford.comN/A+1-800-841-3673
Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands
ssacrc@ford.comN/AN/ASub-Saharan Africa
infokr1@ford.com or
infokr@lincoln.com
N/A+82-02-1600-6003South Korea
If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Global Trade Services
by emailing, expcso@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
149
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motor-
vehicles.html (English)
Website
http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehicules-
automobiles.html (French)
Website
1-800-333-0510Phone
Ford of Canada Contact Information
www.ford.caWebsite
1-800-565-3673Phone
150
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the
battery before servicing high current
fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of
electrical shock, always replace the
cover to the power distribution box
before reconnecting the battery or
refilling fluid reservoirs.
Note: If your vehicle has dual batteries,
disconnecting the primary under hood
battery does not remove power from all
circuits.
The engine compartment fuse box is in the
engine compartment. It has high-current
fuses that protect your vehicle's main
electrical systems from overloads.
If you disconnect and reconnect the
battery, you need to reset some features.
See Changing the 12V Battery (page 173).
Replace fuses with the same type and
rating. See Changing a Fuse (page 159).
E251921
151
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Number
Horn.20 A1
Blower motor.50 A2
Not used.—3
Starter relay.30 A4
Not used (spare).20 A5
Upfitter relay 4 (cutaway).20 A6
Not used (spare) (stripped chassis).
Not used.—8
Not used.—10
Power point 4.20 A12
Yaw sensor (stripped chassis).10 A13
Not used (spare) (cutaway).
Forward looking radar (cutaway).10 A14
Not used (spare) (stripped chassis).
Not used.—15
Not used.—16
Powertrain control module run/start feed.10 A17
Anti-lock brake system run/start feed.10 A18
Not used.—19
Wiper power.30 A20
Not used.—21
Wiper module (stripped chassis).10 A22
Not used (spare) (cutaway).
Not used.—23
Body control module - run power in feed 2.40 A24
Body control module - run power in feed 1.50 A25
Not used.—26
152
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Number
Body builder frame connector.20 A27
Not used.—28
B+ power 12 V(special order vehicle).10 A29
Power driver seat (cutaway).30 A30
Not used (spare) (stripped chassis).
Not used.—31
Vehicle power 1.20 A32
Vehicle power 2.20 A33
Vehicle power 3.10 A34
Vehicle power 4.20 A35
Not used.—36
Not used.—37
Washer relay (stripped chassis).10 A38
Not used (spare) (cutaway).
Not used.—39
Trailer brake control connector.30 A41
Instrument panel connector (stripped chassis).30 A43
Not used (spare) (cutaway).
Not used.—45
A/C clutch.10 A46
Upfitter relay 1 (cutaway).40 A47
Not used (spare) (stripped chassis).
Not used.—48
Pump electronics module.30 A49
Injectors.15 A50
Power point 1.20 A51
B-pillar vehicle connector (cutaway).50 A52
Not used (spare) (stripped chassis).
153
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Number
Trailer tow park lamps.30 A53
Upfitter 2 relay (cutaway).40 A54
Not used (spare) (stripped chassis).
Upfitter 3 relay (cutaway).20 A55
Not used (spare) (stripped chassis).
Power point 2 prep B-pillar connector.20 A56
USB smart charger.5 A58
Park lamps 1 (special order vehicle).10 A59
Not used.—60
Not used.—61
Not used.—62
Not used.—63
Not used.—64
Not used.—65
Not used.—66
Not used.—67
Not used.—69
Inverter.40 A70
Anti-lock brake system valves.30 A71
Brake on and off switch.10 A72
Not used.—73
Not used.—74
Not used.—75
Anti-lock brake system pump.60 A76
Voltage quality module power - body control module.30 A77
Trailer tow stop lamps.10 A78
Not used.—79
154
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Number
Trailer tow backup lamps.10 A80
Not used.—81
Run/start fuse - upfitter relays (cutaway).5 A82
B+ fuse - upfitter relay.
Not used.—83
Not used.—84
Not used.—85
Not used.—86
Not used.—87
Not used.—88
Not used.—89
B-pillar (cutaway).40 A91
Instrument panel (stripped chassis).
Park lamps 3 (special order vehicle).10 A93
Park lamps 2 (special order vehicle).10 A94
Stop lamp relay.20 A95
Not used.—96
Engine.50 A97
B-pillar vehicle connector.
Instrument panel.
Trailer tow battery charge.30 A98
Instrument panel connector.40 A99
Not used.—100
Not used.—101
Not used.—102
Not used.—103
155
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Number
Not used.—104
Trailer tow right-hand and left-hand stop and direction indicator relay
power.
15 A105
Note: Spare fuse amperage may vary.
Protected ComponentFuse RatingRelay Number
Powertrain control module.—R02
Power relay.
Not used.—R05
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the
battery before servicing high current
fuses.
Note: If your vehicle has dual batteries,
disconnecting the primary under hood
battery does not remove power from all
circuits.
The fuse panel is to the left-hand side of
the brake pedal and mounted onto the
lower left-hand cowl panel. Remove the
fuse panel cover to access the fuses.
To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller tool
provided on the inside of the fuse panel
cover.
Replace fuses with the same type and
rating. See Changing a Fuse (page 159).
156
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Fuses
E145984
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Number
Not used.—1
Left-hand front and right-hand front door lock switch (cutaway).10 A2
Inverter (cutaway).
Connector (stripped chassis).
Power mirror switch (cutaway).7.5 A3
Not used (stripped chassis).—
Trailer brake control.20 A4
Not used (spare).20 A5
Not used (spare).10 A6
Not used (spare).10 A7
Not used (spare).10 A8
Not used (spare).10 A9
Not used.—10
Not used.—11
Smart datalink connector.7.5 A12
157
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Number
Enterprise wired-in-device.
Cluster.7.5 A13
Steering column control module.
Not used (spare).15 A14
Not used (spare).15 A15
Not used.—16
Not used.7.5 A17
Climate mode switch.7.5 A18
Radio transceiver module.5 A19
Ignition switch.5 A20
Not used.5 A21
Body builder B-pillar connector (cutaway).5 A22
Not used (stripped chassis).5 A
Not used (spare).30 A23
Not used (spare).30 A24
Not used (spare).20 A25
Not used (spare).30 A26
Not used (spare).30 A27
Not used (spare).30 A28
Upfitter interface module (cutaway).15 A29
Not used (stripped chassis).—
Not used (spare).5 A30
Smart datalink connector.10 A31
Radio.20 A32
Not used.—33
Not used (spare).30 A34
Tow haul switch.5 A35
158
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Number
Rear view mirror (cutaway).15 A36
Rear view camera (cutaway).
Not used (stripped chassis).—
Not used (spare).20 A37
Rear window switches and motors (cutaway).30 A38
Not used (stripped chassis).—
Note: Spare fuse amperage may vary.
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING: Always replace a fuse
with one that has the specified
amperage rating. Using a fuse with a
higher amperage rating can cause severe
wire damage and could start a fire.
E217331
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.
159
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Fuses
Fuse Types
E267379
Micro 2.A
Micro 3.B
Maxi.C
Mini.D
M Case.E
J Case.F
J Case Low Profile.G
Slotted M Case.H
160
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with the
air cleaner removed and do not remove
it while the engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
E196351
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the bottom left
corner of the instrument panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and push
the auxiliary latch, located in the center
of the top grille, to the left in order to
release the hood.
3. Lift the hood and secure it with the
prop rod.
161
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW
E312299
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 173).A
Automatic transmission fluid dipstick. See Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check (page 169).
B
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 163).C
Air cleaner assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 178).D
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 163).E
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 171).F
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 165).G
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 151).H
Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 172).I
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 173).J
162
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
E161560
A B
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL CHECK
To check the engine oil level consistently
and accurately, do the following:
1. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
2. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
3. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
4. Switch the engine off and wait 15
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan. Checking the engine oil level too
soon after you switch the engine off
may result in an inaccurate reading.
5. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 161).
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. See Under
Hood Overview (page 162).
7. Replace the dipstick and remove it
again to check the oil level. See
Engine Oil Dipstick (page 163).
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
the maximum and minimum marks. If
the oil level is at the minimum mark,
add oil immediately. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 223).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.
Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,100 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
WARNING: Do not remove the filler
cap when the engine is running.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
E142732
163
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Maintenance
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol
conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
To top up the engine oil level do the
following:
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See
Under Hood Overview (page 162).
Turn it counterclockwise and remove
it.
3. Add engine oil that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 223). You may
have to use a funnel to pour the engine
oil into the opening.
4. Recheck the oil level.
5. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR
RESET
Base Cluster
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Settings
Press the down arrow
button, then from this menu
scroll to the following
message.
Vehicle
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Oil Life
Reset
Press and hold the OK
button until the instrument
cluster displays the
following message.
Oil Life
Hold to
Reset
Press and hold the OK
button until the instrument
cluster displays the
following message.
Oil Life
Hold OK
to Reset
Reset Complete
If the instrument cluster
displays the following
message, repeat the
process.
Reset Cancelled
High Series Cluster
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
164
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Maintenance
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the down arrow
button, then from this menu
scroll to the following
message.
Truck Info
Press the OK button.Mainten-
ance
Monitor
Press the down arrow
button, then from this menu
scroll to the following
message.
Oil Life:
xxx%
Press the OK button.Oil Life
Press and hold the OK
button until the instrument
cluster displays the
following message.
Oil Life
Hold OK to
Reset
Oil Life: 100%
When the oil change indic-
ator resets, the instrument
cluster displays 100%.
Repeat the process if the oil
change indicator does not
reset.
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not put coolant in
the windshield washer reservoir. If
sprayed on the windshield, coolant could
make it difficult to see through the
windshield.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant
pressure relief cap. The cooling system
is under pressure. Steam and hot liquid
can come out forcefully when you loosen
the cap slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant
further than the MAX mark.
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at
the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 250).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be
checked using a refractometer. We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentration.
Adding Coolant
WARNING: Do not add engine
coolant when the engine is on or the
cooling system is hot. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
165
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Maintenance
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use coolant or
windshield washer fluid outside of its
specified function and vehicle location.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
component damage may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
It is very important to use prediluted
coolant approved to the correct
specification in order to avoid plugging the
small passageways in the engine cooling
system. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 219). Do not mix
different colors or types of coolant in your
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine
or cooling system components and may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,
use the approved concentrated coolant
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 219).
Using water that has not been deionized
may contribute to deposit formation,
corrosion and plugging of the small cooling
system passageways.
Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and
models may not be approved to Ford
specifications and may cause damage to
the cooling system. Resulting component
damage may not be covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
To top up the coolant level do the
following:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted coolant approved to
the correct specification. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
219).
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to
reach the correct level.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turn
the cap clockwise until it contacts the
hard stop.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle. If necessary, add enough
prediluted engine coolant to bring the
coolant level to the correct level.
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
engine coolant per month, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Operating an engine with a low level of
coolant can result in engine overheating
and possible engine damage.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
coolant may change color, and slightly
darken. As long as the coolant is clear and
uncontaminated, this color change does not
indicate the coolant has degraded nor does
it require the coolant to be drained, the
system to be flushed, or the coolant to be
replaced.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without coolant in order
to reach a vehicle service location. In this
instance, qualified personnel:
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the coolant system.
166
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Maintenance
3. Refill with coolant that meets the
correct specification. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 219).
Water alone, without coolant, can cause
engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
the coolant.
Recycled Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process
is not yet available.
Dispose of used engine coolant in an
appropriate manner. Follow your
community's regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60%
provides improved freeze point
protection. Coolant concentrations
above 60% decrease the overheat
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• You can decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• Coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted coolant for
optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
Coolant Change
At specific mileage intervals, as listed in
the scheduled maintenance information,
the coolant should be changed. Add
prediluted coolant approved to the correct
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 219).
Fail-Safe Cooling
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs. The fail-safe
distance depends on ambient
temperature, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the
coolant temperature gauge moves toward
the red zone:
A warning lamp illuminates and
a message may appear in the
information display.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
167
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Maintenance
When this occurs, your vehicle still
operates, however:
• Engine power is limited.
• The air conditioning system turns off.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for
use during emergencies only. Operate
your vehicle in fail-safe mode only as
long as necessary to bring your vehicle
to rest in a safe location and seek
immediate repairs. When in fail-safe
mode, your vehicle will have limited
power, will not be able to maintain
high-speed operation, and may
completely shut down without warning,
potentially losing engine power, power
steering assist, and power brake assist,
which may increase the possibility of a
crash resulting in serious injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
Your vehicle has limited engine power
when in the fail-safe mode, drive your
vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not
maintain high-speed operation and the
engine may operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend
that you contact your roadside
assistance service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools,
you can re-start the engine. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible to
minimize engine damage.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management (If Equipped)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
crash and injury, be prepared that the
vehicle speed may reduce and the
vehicle may not be able to accelerate
with full power until the coolant
temperature reduces.
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
engine may temporarily reach a higher
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long
or steep slope in high ambient
temperatures.
At this time, you may notice the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
information display.
168
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Maintenance
You may notice a reduction in vehicle
speed caused by reduced engine power in
order to manage the engine coolant
temperature. Your vehicle may enter this
mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place. The
amount of speed reduction depends on
vehicle loading, grade and ambient
temperature. If this occurs, there is no need
to pull off the road. You can continue to
drive your vehicle.
The air conditioning may automatically
turn on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect the engine from
overheating. When the coolant
temperature decreases to the normal
operating temperature, the air conditioning
turns on.
If the coolant temperature gauge moves
fully into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine
soon messages appear in your information
display, do the following:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
park (P).
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. If the
temperature does not drop after
several minutes, follow the remaining
steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, immediately add
prediluted coolant.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart
the engine and continue driving.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
Have an authorized dealer check and
change the transmission fluid and filter at
the correct service interval. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 250).
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.
Checking Automatic Transmission
Fluid
For scheduled intervals of the fluid checks
and changes, See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 250). Your
transmission does not consume fluid.
However, if the transmission is not working
properly, for example, if the transmission
slips or shifts slowly, or if you notice some
sign of fluid leakage, check the fluid level
as soon as possible.
Automatic transmission fluid expands
when warmed. To obtain an accurate fluid
check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal
operating temperature, approximately
19 mi (30 km). Verify that the transmission
fluid temperature gauge on the instrument
cluster is within normal range.
1. Drive the vehicle 19 mi (30 km) until it
reaches normal operating temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
engage the parking brake.
3. With the engine running, parking brake
engaged and your foot on the brake
pedal, move the gearshift lever through
all of the gear ranges. Allow sufficient
time for each gear to engage.
4. Put the transmission in park (P) and
leave the engine running.
169
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Maintenance
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean
with a clean, dry, lint free rag.
6. Install the dipstick, fully seating it in the
filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the
fluid level. The fluid should be in the
designated area for normal operating
temperature or ambient temperature.
Low Fluid Level
E163740
Do not drive the vehicle if there is no
indication of fluid on the dipstick and the
ambient temperature is above 50°F
(10°C).
Correct Fluid Level
E163742
Drive the vehicle 19 mi (30 km) or until it
reaches normal operating temperature.
Check the fluid at the normal operating
temperature of 196°F (91°C) to 215°F
(102°C) on a level surface.
High Fluid Level
E163744
Fluid levels above the safe range may
result in transmission failure. An overfill
condition of transmission fluid may cause
shift and engagement concerns, and
possible damage.
An overheating condition can cause high
fluid levels.
Adjusting Automatic Transmission
Fluid Levels
Note: Use of a non-approved automatic
transmission fluid may cause internal
transmission component damage.
Make sure to use the correct type of fluid.
You can find the type of fluid used on the
transmission dipstick, or in your owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 219).
If necessary, add fluid in 8 fl oz (250 ml)
increments through the filler tube until the
level is correct.
170
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Maintenance
E163746
If an overfill occurs, have a qualified
technician remove excess fluid.
Note: An overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift and engagement
concerns, and possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Filter
E196355
Your automatic transmission has a
serviceable transmission fluid filter inside
the transmission bottom pan. For service
intervals for the automatic transmission
fluid and transmission filter, See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 250).
For transmission filter maintenance, see
your authorized dealer.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNING: Do not use any fluid
other than the recommended brake fluid
as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use
of incorrect fluid could result in the loss
of vehicle control, serious personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Only use brake fluid
from a sealed container. Contamination
with dirt, water, petroleum products or
other materials may result in brake
system damage or failure. Failure to
adhere to this warning could result in the
loss of vehicle control, serious personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow the fluid
to touch your skin or eyes. If this
happens, rinse the affected areas
immediately with plenty of water and
contact your physician.
WARNING: The brake system
could be affected if the brake fluid level
is below the MIN mark or above the MAX
mark on the brake fluid reservoir.
171
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Maintenance
E170684
1. Park your vehicle on a level surface.
2. Look at the brake fluid reservoir to see
where the brake fluid level is relative
to the MIN and the MAX marks on the
reservoir.
Note: If the brake fluid level is between the
MIN and the MAX marks on the reservoir, it
is acceptable.
Note: If the brake fluid level is below the
MIN mark or above the MAX mark, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Note: To avoid fluid contamination, the
reservoir cap must remain in place and fully
tight, unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 219).
Brake Fluid Service Interval
Brake fluid absorbs water over time which
degrades the effectiveness of the brake
fluid. Change the brake fluid at the
specified intervals to prevent degraded
braking performance.
For detailed interval information, see
Scheduled Maintenance in your Owner's
Manual or your local maintenance guide.
POWER STEERING FLUID
CHECK
WARNING: A fluid level between
the MAX and MIN lines is within the
normal operating range and there is no
need to add fluid. A fluid level not in the
normal operating range could
compromise the performance of the
system.
WARNING: For E-350 and E-450
vehicles with the Hydro-Boost Brake
System, do not press the brake pedal
after the engine has been turned off.
Pressing the brake pedal after the engine
has been turned off will give a false
power steering fluid level reading.
Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 223).
To top up the power steering fluid level do
the following.
1. Start the engine and let it run until it
reaches normal operating temperature.
2. Make sure the fluid is within the MIN
and MAX range.
3. If the fluid level is low, add fluid to be
within the MIN and MAX range. Do not
overfill.
4. While the engine idles, turn the steering
wheel left and right several times.
5. Recheck the fluid level in the reservoir.
Note: Do not operate the vehicle with a low
power steering pump fluid level.
172
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING: If you operate your
vehicle in temperatures below 40°F
(5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid
with antifreeze protection in cold
weather could result in impaired
windshield vision and increase the risk
of injury or accident.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 219).
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
is not needed.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNING: This vehicle may be
fitted with more than one battery,
removal of cable from only one battery
does not disconnect the vehicle
electrical system. Be sure to disconnect
cables from all batteries when
disconnecting power. Failure to do so
may cause serious personal injury or
property damage.
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can
cause personal injury. Therefore, do not
allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always
shield your face and protect your eyes.
Always provide proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a
plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure
on the end walls could cause acid to flow
through the vent caps, resulting in
personal injury and/or damage to the
vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a
battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain
sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,
eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when
working near the battery to protect
against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin
or eyes, flush immediately with water for
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed,
call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
hands after handling.
Note: If your vehicle battery has a cover,
make sure it is reinstalled after the battery
has been cleaned or replaced.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories
or components added to the vehicle by the
dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraft®
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water during
its life of service.
173
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Maintenance
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry. Also,
make certain the battery cables are always
tightly fastened to the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
Always dispose of automotive batteries in
a responsible manner. Follow your local
authorized standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center to find
out more about recycling automotive
batteries.
Reconnecting the Battery
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained
by power from the battery. When the
battery is disconnected or a new battery
is installed, the engine must relearn its idle
and fuel trim strategy for optimum
driveability and performance. Flexible fuel
vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the
ethanol content of the fuel for optimum
driveability and performance.
To begin this process.
1. Switch off all accessories and start the
engine.
2. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
3. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
4. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine
to idle for at least one minute.
5. Fully press the foot brake. Release the
parking brake. Shift the gearshift lever
to Drive (D) and allow the engine to
idle for at least one minute.
6. Drive the vehicle for approximately
10 mi (16 km) to complete the
relearning process.
Note: If you do not carry out the above
process, the idle quality of your vehicle may
be adversely affected until the idle trim is
eventually relearned.
Flexible fuel vehicles operating on E85 may
experience poor starts and driveability
problems until the fuel trim and ethanol
content have been relearned.
When the battery is disconnected or a new
battery installed, the transmission must
learn its adaptive strategy. As a result of
this, the transmission may shift firmly. This
operation is considered normal and fully
updates transmission operation to its
optimum shift feel. We recommend that
the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan
to store your vehicle for an extended period
of time. This minimizes the discharge of
your battery during storage.
Dual Batteries (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be fitted with a
frame-mounted battery located on the
passenger side frame rail, behind the front
passenger door. This battery is connected
in parallel with the battery in the engine
compartment. Both batteries are used to
start the vehicle.
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
174
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Maintenance
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
You can manually move the wiper arms
when the ignition is off. This allows for ease
of blade replacement and cleaning under
the blades.
E165804
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away
from the glass.
A
E165794
2. Release the wiper blade lock (A) and
separate the wiper blade from the
wiper arm.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade
back on the windshield. The wiper arms will
automatically return to their normal position
when you turn the ignition on.
• Replace wiper blades at least once per
year for optimum performance.
• You can improve poor wiper quality by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
We properly aim the headlamps on your
vehicle at the assembly plant. If your
vehicle has been in an accident, have an
authorized dealer check the alignment of
your headlamps.
Vertical Aim Adjustment
Procedure
You can only adjust the headlamps
vertically. Your vehicle does not require
horizontal aim adjustments.
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters).A
Center height of lamp to ground.B
25 feet (7.6 meters).C
Horizontal reference line.D
To adjust the headlamps:
175
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Maintenance
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a
wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away.
2. Measure the height of the headlamp
bulb center from the ground and mark
an 8 ft (2.4 m) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this
height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood.
E142465
4. On the wall or screen, you will observe
a flat zone of high intensity light
located at the top of the right hand
portion of the beam pattern. If the top
edge of the high intensity light zone is
not at the horizontal reference line, you
will need to adjust the headlamp.
E163806
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise or counterclockwise in order
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp.
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to adjust the
other headlamp.
7. Close the hood and switch off the
lamps.
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in
the off position, then open the hood.
E196385
2. Remove the three screws from the
headlamp assembly and pull the
assembly straight out.
176
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Maintenance
3. Disconnect the electrical connector by
squeezing the release tab and pushing
the connector forward, then pulling it
rearward.
4. Remove the headlamp.
To install the new lamp, follow the
removal procedures in reverse order.
CHANGING A BULB
Lamp Assembly Condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to
accommodate normal changes in
pressure. Condensation can be a natural
by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the
vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the
temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
thin mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip
marks or droplets).
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable moisture
(usually caused by a lamp water leak) are:
• Water puddle inside the lamp.
• Large water droplets, drip marks or
streaks present on the interior of the
lens.
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if
any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
Replacing Headlamp Bulbs
WARNING: Make sure the bulbs
have cooled down before removing
them. Failure to follow this warning could
result in serious personal injury.
Note: Grasp the bulb by only its plastic base
and do not touch the glass. The oil from your
hand could cause the bulb to break the next
time the headlamps are operated.
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched,
clean it with rubbing alcohol before use.
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in
the off position, then open the hood.
2. Remove the headlamp. See
Removing a Headlamp (page 176).
3. Disconnect the electrical connector by
squeezing the release tab and pushing
the connector forward, then pulling it
rearward.
E196386
4. Remove the bulb assembly by turning
it counterclockwise and pulling it
straight out.
To install the new bulb, follow the removal
procedures in reverse order.
177
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Maintenance
Replacing Front Parking Lamp and
Direction Indicator Bulbs
E196388
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in
the off position, then open the hood.
2. Remove the headlamp assembly. Refer
to Replacing Headlamp Bulbs in this
section.
3. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove.
4. Carefully pry up the bulb straight out
of the socket.
To complete installation, follow the
removal procedures in reverse order.
Replacing Side Marker Bulbs
E196390
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in
the off position, then open the hood.
2. Remove the headlamp assembly. Refer
to Replacing Headlamp Bulbs in this
section.
3. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove.
4. Carefully pry up the bulb straight out
of the socket.
To complete installation, follow the
removal procedures in reverse order.
Replacing
Brake/Tail/Turn/Reverse Lamp
Bulbs (Cut-Away Only)
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
E163828
2. Remove the four screws and the lamp
lens from the lamp assembly.
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight out of
the socket and push in the new bulb.
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with the
air cleaner removed and do not remove
it while the engine is running.
178
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Maintenance
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if the
correct air filter element is not used.
When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed. See
Motorcraft Parts (page 219). The air filter
element should be replaced at the
appropriate intervals. See Normal
Scheduled Maintenance (page 253).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage
may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
E310547
1. Release the clips (x2) that secure the
two halves of the air filter housing
together.
E310548
2. Carefully separate the two halves of
the air filter housing.
3. Remove the air filter element from the
housing.
4. Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter element
edges between the air filter housing.
This could cause filter damage and
allow unfiltered air to enter the engine
if not properly seated.
5. Install the air filter housing cover. Use
special care to ensure that the air
cleaner cover is reinstalled correctly.
Verify that the tabs at the rear of the
air cleaner housing cover are fully
inserted into the slots at the rear of the
air cleaner housing tray.
6. Secure the air filter housing clips (x2).
179
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect
its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
Materials
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
SpecificationName
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M5B194-BMotorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P3-AMotorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. &
Canada)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37-
A/B/D/F (Canada)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner,
ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada)
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
• Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
180
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• When filling with AdBlue®, remove any
residue on painted surfaces
immediately.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
Cleaning the Headlamps
Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses
or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or
chemical solvents to clean them.
Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when
they are dry.
Exterior Chrome Parts
• Apply a high quality-cleaning product
to bumpers and other chrome parts.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Bright Metal Cleaner.
• Do not apply the cleaning product to
hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
than the time recommended.
• Using non-recommended cleaners can
result in severe and permanent
cosmetic damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
spots are present, we recommend
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
• Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
• Do not use water hotter than 179°F
(82°C).
• Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
angle pattern.
• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your
vehicle's surface.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Underbody
Regularly clean the underside of your
vehicle using water. Keep body and door
drain holes free of debris or foreign
material.
Under Hood
For removing black rubber marks from
under the hood we recommend Motorcraft
Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.
181
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
applying wax.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
• Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black)
colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas.
• After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
Shampoo.
Note: If your vehicle has an engine cover
remove the cover before application of
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser.
Immediately rinse away any over spray.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
182
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When
cleaning the interior of the windshield,
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
any glass cleaner off these surfaces
immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning
solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken
the belt webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped
with seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Such products could contaminate the
side airbag system and affect
performance of the side airbag in a crash.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and seats
equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
• If grease or tar is present on the
material, spot-clean the area first with
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
materials.
Mirrors
Do not clean the housing or glass of any
mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING: Do not use chemical
solvents or strong detergents when
cleaning the steering wheel or
instrument panel to avoid contamination
of the airbag system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats
(page 184).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
these areas.
183
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
• Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these
may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and
cluster lens.
• Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
soft cloth as quickly as possible.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
or stain remover on an inconspicuous
area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a
clean, soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the
soiled area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing stains such as
dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium
Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a
commercially available leather cleaning
product for automotive interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as
soon as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended
specifically for rubber, vinyl and
plastics.
184
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
color code to your authorized dealer to
make sure you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use
a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.
CLEANING THE WHEELS
1. Regularly clean them with a wheel
cleaner. We recommend that you use
Ford approved wheel cleaner if
available.
2. Remove dirt and brake dust with a
sponge.
3. Remove tar and grease with a bug and
tar remover. We recommend that you
use Ford approved bug and tar remover
if available.
4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with water
after cleaning.
If you intend on parking your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels
with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for
a few minutes before doing so. This
reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake
discs, brake pads and linings.
Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
Note: Some car washes could damage
wheel rims and covers.
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners,
harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel
cleaners or abrasive materials could
damage wheel rims and covers.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles
and their components for reliable, regular
driving. Under various conditions,
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
and the underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil.
185
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast
idle with the climate controls set to
defrost until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Disconnecting Your 12 Volt Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect
the battery cables to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if you disconnect the battery
cables.
Brakes
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
186
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
• Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
187
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
Notice to Utility Vehicle, Van and
Truck Owners
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles. To reduce the
risk of serious injury or death from a
rollover or other crash you must avoid
sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers, drive
at safe speeds for the conditions, keep
tires properly inflated, never overload or
improperly load your vehicle, and make
sure every passenger is properly
restrained.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a seat
belt. All occupants must wear seat belts.
Children and infants must use
appropriate restraints to minimize the
risk of injury or ejection.
E145298
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
How Your Vehicle Differs from
Other Vehicles
Sport-utility vehicles, vans and trucks can
differ from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:
E145299
188
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
• Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
• Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
All other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
• Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
E166373
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, sport-utility vehicles, vans and
trucks often will have a higher center of
gravity and a greater difference in center
of gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your vehicle
so versatile also make it handle differently
than an ordinary passenger car.
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
The Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
189
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford
Motor Company to give you the
following information about tire
grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
½) times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction
grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The
temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
190
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the sidewall
of each tire providing information
about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set
pressure. For example: For
P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and
for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure does not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi
(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure
does not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for
1.0 mi (1.6 km).
*Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door.
B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
191
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that may be used for service on
cars, sport utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks. Note: If
your tire size does not begin with
a letter this may mean it is
designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to
how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not,
contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
192
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes
the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time under a standard
condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81–186 mph
(130–299 km/h). These ratings
are listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
mph ( km/h)Letter
rating
75 (120)L
81 (130)M
87 (140)N
99 (159)Q
106 (171)R
112 (180)S
118 (190)T
124 (200)U
130 (210)H
149 (240)V
mph ( km/h)Letter
rating
168 (270)W
186 (299)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299
km/h), tire manufacturers always
use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number: This begins with the
letters DOT and indicates that the
tire meets all federal standards.
The next two numbers or letters
are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the
next two are the tire size code and
the last four numbers represent
the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers
317 mean the 31st week of 1997.
After 2000 the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means
the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are
identification codes used for
traceability. This information is
used to contact customers if a tire
defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
193
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire. (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or
the edge of the driver's door.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear: The treadwear
grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified
government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would
wear 1½ times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100.
*Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure
on the vehicle label.
194
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load
or radial tubeless.
Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall
for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires. These differences are
described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual;
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single; defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
195
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires. These differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or
lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You can find a Tire Label
containing tire inflation pressure
by tire size and other important
information located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver's door.
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are
properly inflated. Remember that
a tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if
equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended
by Ford Motor Company.
196
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. Ford
recommends the use of a digital
or dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold
inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns
WARNING: Under-inflation
is the most common cause of
tire failures and may result in
severe tire cracking, tread
separation or blowout, with
unexpected loss of vehicle
control and increased risk of
injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat
buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control and
accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the
Ford recommended inflation
pressure even if it is less than the
maximum inflation pressure
information found on the tire. The
Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post,
or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or
the edge of the driver's door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles
Note: Do not reduce tire pressure
to change the ride characteristics
of the vehicle. If you do not
maintain the inflation pressure at
the levels specified by Ford, your
vehicle may experience a condition
known as shimmy. Shimmy is a
severe vibration and oscillation in
the steering wheel after the vehicle
travels over a bump or dip in the
road that does not dampen out by
itself. Shimmy may result from
significant under-inflation of the
tires, improper tires (load range,
size, or type), or vehicle
modifications such as lift-kits. In
the event that your vehicle
experiences shimmy, you should
slowly reduce speed by either lifting
off the accelerator pedal or lightly
applying the brakes. The shimmy
ceases as the vehicle speed
decreases.
Maximum Inflation Pressure is
the tire manufacturer's maximum
permissible pressure and the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
197
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
the manufacturer’s recommended
cold inflation pressure which can
be found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure
on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature
changes occur, tire inflation
pressures also change. A 10°F
(6°C) temperature drop can
cause a corresponding drop of
1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure.
Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the
proper pressure which can be
found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your
tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool,
meaning they are not hot from
driving even a mile.
Note: If you are checking tire
pressure when the tire is hot, (for
example, driven more than 1.0 mi
(1.6 km)), never bleed or reduce air
pressure. The tires are hot from
driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A
hot tire at or below recommended
cold inflation pressure could be
significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a
distance to get air for your tire(s),
check and record the tire pressure
first and add the appropriate air
pressure when you get to the
pump. It is normal for tires to heat
up and the air pressure inside to go
up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve
on one tire, then firmly press the
tire gauge onto the valve and
measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release
air by pressing on the metal stem
in the center of the valve. Then
recheck the pressure with your tire
gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each
tire, including the spare.
198
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: Some spare tires operate at
a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T type mini-spare
tires, (see the Dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly
information for a description. Store
and maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar).
For full-size and dissimilar spare
tires, see the Dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly information for
a description. Store and maintain
at the higher of the front and rear
inflation pressure as shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to
make sure there are no nails or
other objects embedded that
could poke a hole in the tire and
cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make
sure there are no gouges, cuts or
bulges.
Tire Inflation Information
WARNING: An inflated tire
and rim can be very dangerous
if improperly used, serviced or
maintained. To reduce the risk
of serious injury, never attempt
to re-inflate a tire which has
been run flat or seriously
under-inflated without first
removing the tire from the wheel
assembly for inspection. Do not
attempt to add air to tires or
replace tires or wheels without
first taking precautions to
protect persons and property.
All tires with Steel Carcass Plies
(if equipped):
This type of tire utilizes steel cords
in the sidewalls. As such, they
cannot be treated like normal light
truck tires. Tire service, including
adjusting tire pressure, must be
performed by personnel trained,
supervised and equipped
according to Federal Occupational
Safety and Health Administration
regulations. For example, during
any procedure involving tire
inflation, the technician or
individual must utilize a remote
inflation device, and ensure that
all persons are clear of the
trajectory area.
199
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
E161437
200
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
E161438
1
Note: Stay out of the trajectory (1)
as indicated in the illustration.
Inspecting Your Tires and
Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones,
nails or glass that may be wedged
in the tread grooves. Check the tire
and valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that may permit air
leakage and repair or replace the
tire and replace the valve stem.
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of
excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all your
tires, including the spare,
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following
conditions exist:
201
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2
millimeters), tires must be
replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or wear bars, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread appears
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to one sixteenth of an inch
(2 millimeters).
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or
sidewall). If damage is observed
or suspected have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
WARNING: Tires degrade
over time depending on many
factors such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
(load, speed, inflation pressure)
the tires experience throughout
their lives.
In general, tires should be
replaced after six years
regardless of tread wear.
However, heat caused by hot
climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the
aging process and may require
tires to be replaced more
frequently.
You should replace your spare
tire when you replace the road
tires or after six years due to
aging even if it has not been
used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
202
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
Tire Replacement
Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
WARNING: Only use
replacement tires and wheels
that are the same size, load
index, speed rating and type
(such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel
size may be found on either the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or
the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or the
Tire Label which is located on
the B-Pillar or edge of the
driver's door. If this information
is not found on these labels, then
you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: To reduce the
risk of serious injury, when
mounting replacement tires and
wheels, you should not exceed
the maximum pressure indicated
on the sidewall of the tire to set
the beads without additional
precautions listed below. If the
beads do not seat at the
maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
203
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: For a mounting
pressure more than 20 psi
(1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford
dealer or other tire service
professional should do the
mounting.
WARNING: Always inflate
steel carcass tires with a remote
air fill with the person inflating
standing at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
WARNING: When inflating
the tire for mounting pressures
up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater
than the maximum pressure on
the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
• Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
• Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
• Stand at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.6 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
• Use both eye and ear
protection.
Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle
The two front tires or two rear tires
should generally be replaced as a
pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels are not designed to
be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the
operation of your tire pressure
monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring
system indicator is flashing, the
system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or
some component of the system
may be damaged.
Replacing a Tire That is
Greenhouse Gas Certified
The tires installed on this vehicle
at the factory as original
equipment are certified for
Greenhouse Gas and Fuel
Efficiency regulations.
Replacement tires must be of
equal or lower rolling resistance
level (TRRL or Crr). Consult with
your tire supplier(s) for
appropriate replacement tires.
204
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle
is stuck in snow, mud or sand, do
not rapidly spin the tires;
spinning the tires can tear the
tire and cause an explosion. A
tire can explode in as little as
three to five seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the
wheels at over 34 mph
(55 km/h). The tires may fail and
injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal
to do with your tire mileage and
safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on
the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive
there’s always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic.
This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance when driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you’re
driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of your tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer. Front-wheel
drive vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension may
require alignment of all four
wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
205
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Tire Rotation
WARNING: If the tire label
shows different tire pressures for
the front and rear tires and the
vehicle has a tire pressure
monitoring system, then you
need to update the settings for
the system sensors. Always
perform the system reset
procedure after tire rotation. If
you do not reset the system, it
may not provide a low tire
pressure warning when
necessary.
Note: If your tires show uneven
wear ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be
equipped with a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly. A
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval (as
indicated in the Scheduled
Maintenance chapter) helps your
tires wear more evenly, providing
better tire performance and longer
tire life. Sometime irregular tire
wear can be corrected by rotating
the tires.
E142548
Rear-wheel drive vehicles and
four-wheel drive vehicles (front
tires at left of diagram).
206
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
E166988
Dual rear wheel drive vehicle - six
tire rotation (front tires at top of
diagram).
If your vehicle is equipped with
dual rear wheels it is
recommended that the front and
rear tires (in pairs) be rotated only
side to side. We do not
recommend splitting up the dual
rear wheels. Rotate them side to
side as a set. After tire rotation,
inflation pressures must be
adjusted for the tires new
positions in accordance with
vehicle requirements.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the
same size, load index, and speed rating
as those originally provided by Ford. Use
of any tire or wheel not recommended
by Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury, and death. Additionally, the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels
could cause steering, suspension, axle,
transfer case, or power transfer unit
failure. It is also strongly advised to
follow the Ford recommended tire
inflation pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (affixed
to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver’s
seating position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle
handles.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires and cables. If you need
to use cables, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and
specifications) be used, as cables may chip
aluminum wheels.
Note: The suspension insulation and
bumpers help prevent vehicle damage. Do
not remove these components from your
vehicle when using snow tires and chains.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and chains:
207
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle.
• Use only SAE Class S chains.
• Install chains securely, verifying that
the chains do not touch any wiring,
brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains
rub or bang against your vehicle, stop
and retighten the chains. If this does
not work, remove the chains to prevent
damage to your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are
no longer needed. Do not use tire
chains on dry roads.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact your
authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The tire pressure
monitoring system is not a substitute for
manually checking tire pressures. You
should periodically check tire pressures
using a pressure gauge. Failure to
correctly maintain tire pressures could
increase the risk of tire failure, loss of
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor.
Note: If the tire pressure monitoring system
sensor becomes damaged, it may not
function.
Each tire, including the spare, if
provided, should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver's responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale flashes
for approximately one minute and then
remains continuously illuminated. This
sequence continues upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
208
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with License exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
Changing Tires With a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically, at
least monthly, using an accurate tire gauge.
See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to
your vehicle. The low tire pressure warning
light turns on if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is
illuminated, your tires are under-inflated
and need to be inflated to the
manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
209
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When you replace one of the road tires
with the temporary spare, the system
continues to identify an issue to remind
you that you need to repair and put back
on the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:
210
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Customer Action RequiredPossible CauseLow Tire Pressure
Warning Light
Make sure tires are at the proper pres-
sure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label, located on
the edge of driver door or the B-Pillar, the
vehicle must be driven for at least two
minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before
the light turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning
light
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires, such as at
a gas station or in your garage, the tire
pressure monitoring system may not
respond immediately to the air added to
your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
211
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic
tire. When driving in a normal manner, a
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase about 2–4 psi (14–28 kPa)
from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is
stationary overnight with the outside
temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may
decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of
30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by
the tire pressure monitoring system as
being significantly lower than the
recommended inflation pressure and
activate the system warning light for low
tire pressure. If the low tire pressure
warning light is on, visually check each tire
to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check
the air pressure in the road tires. If any tire
is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle
to the nearest location where air can be
added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to
the recommended inflation pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset
Procedure
WARNING: To determine the
required pressure(s) for your vehicle, see
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver seat) or the Tire Label on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door.
Note: You need to perform the tire pressure
monitoring system reset procedure after
each tire rotation.
To provide the vehicle's load carrying
capability, some vehicles require different
recommended tire pressures in the front
tires as compared to the rear tires. The tire
pressure monitoring system on these
vehicles illuminate the low tire pressure
warning light at two different pressures:
one for the front tires and one for the rear
tires.
Since tires need to be rotated to provide
consistent performance and maximum tire
life, the tire pressure monitoring system
needs to know when the tires are rotated
to determine which set of tires are on the
front and which are on the rear. With this
information, the system can detect and
properly warn of low tire pressures.
System reset tips:
• To reduce the chances of interference
from another vehicle, perform the
system reset procedure at least 3 ft
(1 m) away from another vehicle
undergoing the system reset procedure
at the same time.
• Do not wait more than two minutes
between resetting each tire sensor or
the system can time-out and you have
to repeat the entire procedure on all
four wheels.
• A double horn sounds indicating the
need to repeat the procedure.
Performing the System Reset Procedure
- Single Rear Wheel
Read the entire procedure before
attempting.
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph
(32 km/h) for at least two minutes,
then park in a safe location where you
can easily get to all four tires and have
access to an air pump.
2. Place the ignition in the off position and
keep the key in the ignition.
212
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
3. Cycle the ignition to the on position
with the engine off.
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off
three times. You must accomplish this
within 10 seconds. If you successfully
enter the reset mode, the horn sounds
once, the system indicator flashes and
a message shows in the information
display. If this does not occur, please
try again starting at step 2. If after
repeated attempts to enter the reset
mode, the horn does not sound, the
system indicator does not flash and no
message shows in the information
display, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
5. Train the tire pressure monitoring
system sensors in the tires using the
following system reset sequence
starting with the left front tire in the
following clockwise order: Left front -
driver side front tire, Right front -
passenger side front tire, Right rear -
passenger side rear tire, Left rear -
driver side rear tire.
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left front tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
Note: The single horn tone confirms that
the sensor identification code has been
learned by the module for this position. If
you hear a double horn, the reset procedure
was unsuccessful, and you must repeat it.
7. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right front tire. Decrease
the air pressure until the horn sounds.
8. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right rear tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
9. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left rear tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
Training is complete after the horn
sounds for the last tire trained, driver
side rear tire, the system indicator
stops flashing, and a message shows
in the information display.
10. Turn the ignition off. If you hear two
short tones, the reset procedure was
unsuccessful and you must repeat it.
If you hear two short beeps when the
ignition is off after repeating the
procedure, have the system checked
as soon as possible
11. Set all four tires to the recommended
air pressure as indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label, affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position or
Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver door.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: To determine the
required pressure(s) for your vehicle, see
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver seat) or the Tire Label on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door.
Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor.
213
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light illuminates when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
Note: Do not use wheels or lug nuts
different than the original equipment, as this
may damage the wheel or mounting system.
If you get a flat tire when driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized
dealer in order to prevent damage to the
tire pressure monitoring system sensors.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 208). Replace the spare tire with a
road tire as soon as possible. During
repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have
the authorized dealer inspect the tire
pressure monitoring system sensor for
damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these
guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or
death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that were originally provided
by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire
begins with the letter T for tire size and
may have Temporary Use Only molded in
the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label
on wheel: This spare tire has a label on
the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND
TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE
ONLY.
When driving with one of the dissimilar
spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
• Tow a trailer.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
• Use commercial car washing
equipment.
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires
listed above at any one wheel location can
lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without
label on wheel
214
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use commercial car washing
equipment.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: When one of the front
wheels is off the ground, the
transmission alone will not prevent the
vehicle from moving or slipping off the
jack, even if the transmission is in park
(P).
WARNING: To help prevent your
vehicle from moving when changing a
wheel, shift the transmission into park
(P), set the parking brake and use an
appropriate block or wheel chock to
secure the wheel diagonally opposite to
the wheel being changed. For example,
when changing the front left wheel,
place an appropriate block or wheel
chock on the right rear wheel.
WARNING: Do not get under a
vehicle that is only supported by a
vehicle jack.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
change a tire on the side of the vehicle
close to moving traffic. Pull far enough
off the road to avoid the danger of being
hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
WARNING: Always use the jack
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle. If using a jack other than the one
provided, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight,
including any vehicle cargo or
modifications. If you are unsure if the jack
capacity is adequate, contact the
authorized dealer.
Note: Passengers should not remain in your
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Removing the flat wheel and tire
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off.
215
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
E142551
3. Block both directions of the wheel that
is diagonally opposite to the wheel that
is being lifted.
4. Remove the spare tire and jack from
the storage location.
5. Remove the wheel trim (if equipped)
by inserting the tapered end of the lug
nut wrench behind the wheel cover or
hubcap and twist it off.
6. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half
turn counterclockwise, but do not
remove them until the wheel is raised
off the ground.
Jacking location
E201348
Front axle jacking point: Place the jack
under the pin on the front surface of the
front axle.
Note: Do not place the jack under or on the
steering linkage.
E201346
Rear axle jacking points: All models except
E-350 and E-450 dual rear wheel.
E201347
Rear axle jacking points: E-350 and E-450
dual rear wheel.
Installing the spare wheel and tire
1. Refer to the diagrams above to locate
the correct jacking point for your
vehicle.
2. Raise the vehicle by using the jack
handle to turn the jack nut clockwise.
Once the flat tire is raised above the
ground, remove the lug nuts with the
lug wrench.
216
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
3. Replace the flat tire with the spare,
making sure the valve stem of the
spare is facing outward when replacing
a front wheel or the rear wheel position
on vehicles with single rear wheel
fitments. For vehicles with dual rear
wheels, the valve stem of the spare
must face outward when replacing an
inner wheel, but must face inward
when replacing an outboard wheel.
4. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is
snug against the hub. Do not fully
tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle
has been lowered
5. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counter-clockwise.
E161441
1
3
4
2
7
6
5
8
6. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page 217).
7. Install any wheel covers or hubcaps.
Make sure they snap into place.
8. Stow the jack and lug wrench.
9. Unblock the wheels.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign
materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel
hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of
the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel
mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while
your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death.
lb.ft (Nm)Bolt size
140 lb.ft (190 Nm)9/16 x 18 two-piece lug nut
On vehicles equipped with single rear wheels, retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque
at 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing
a flat tire, wheel removal).
On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels, retighten the wheel lug nuts to the specified
torque at 100 miles (160 kilometers), and again at 500 miles (800 kilometers) of new
vehicle operation and after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat
tire, wheel removal).
217
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
E161443
On all two-piece flat wheel nuts,
apply one drop of motor oil
between the flat washer and the
nut. Do not apply motor oil to the
wheel nut threads or the wheel
stud threads.
E145950
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot hole and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
218
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
7.3L V8 EngineEngine
445 in³ (7,293 cm³)Displacement.
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel.
1-5-4-8-6-3-7-2Firing order.
Coil near spark plug with spark plug wireIgnition system.
0.049 in (1.25 mm) - 0.053 in (1.35 mm)Spark plug gap.
10.5:1Compression ratio.
Drivebelt Routing
Single Alternator
E305075
Drivebelt closest to the engine.A
Drivebelt furthest from the
engine.
B
Dual Alternator
E298579
Drivebelt closest to the engine.A
Drivebelt furthest from the
engine.
B
MOTORCRAFT PARTS
Motorcraft Part numberComponent
FA-1953Air filter element.
BXT-65-750One battery.
BXT-65-750Two batteries (optional).
219
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Motorcraft Part numberComponent
FL-820-S
Engine oil filter.
1
SP-586
Spark plug.
2
FT-187Transmission fluid filter.
WW-2005Windshield wiper blade.
1
If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
2
For spark plug replacement, contact your authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at
the recommended intervals. See Normal Scheduled Maintenance (page 253).
We recommend Motorcraft® parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at
www.fordparts.com. These parts are engineered for your vehicle, and meet or exceed our
specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
220
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
221
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.
CodeDescription
PSix-speed automatic transmission 6R140
222
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Use oil and fluid that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil and fluid that meets
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, it could result in:
• Component damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Reduced brake performance.
Air Conditioning System
WARNING: The air conditioning
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury.
Capacities
Refrigerant OilRefrigerantVariant
7.00 fl oz (207 ml)26.98 oz (0.765 kg)Front only.
14.00 fl oz (414 ml)33.02 oz (0.936 kg)With prep pack.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSH-M17B19-AMotorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant (U.S.)
R-134a Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-134a (Canada)
YN-19 (U.S.)
CYN-19-R (Canada)
WSH-M1C231-BMotorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (U.S.)
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil / Huile
PAG pour compresseur frigorifique Motorcraft®
(Canada)
YN-12-D (U.S. & Canada)
Automatic Transmission
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid could cause
transmission damage.
223
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
QuantityVariant
17.4 qt (16.5 L)
1
All.
1
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount could vary during fluid changes.
Materials
SpecificationName
MERCON® LV WSS-M2C938-AMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid (U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid / Huile pour boîte automatique MERCON® LV
Motorcraft® (Canada)
XT-10-QLVC (U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6 (Canada)
Engine Coolant
Capacities
QuantityVariant
20.0 qt (18.9 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B57-A2Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft® (Canada)
VC-13DL-G (U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G (Canada)
224
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Oil
E142732
E276075
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN PLUS requirements and display the
API Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that your
vehicle warranty does not cover.
Capacities
Including the Oil FilterVariant
8.0 qt (7.6 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-B1Engine Oil - SAE 5W-30 - Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
(U.S.)
Engine Oil - SAE 5W-30 - Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-30
Motorcraft® (Canada)
XO-5W30-Q1SP (U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6 (Canada)
225
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C953-B1Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30
E240523
Fuel Tank
Capacities
QuantityVariant
39.9 gal (151 L)Standard.
54.9 gal (208 L)Optional or E-Super Duty.
Grease
226
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
ESB-M1C93-BMotorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray / Graisse
tout usage en aérosol Motorcraft® (Canada)
XL-5-A (U.S. & Canada)
Vacuum Brake System
Capacities
QuantityVariant
Fill as required.All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M6C65-A2Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid (U.S.)
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de frein automobile
haute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft® (Canada)
PM-20 (U.S. & Canada)
WSS-M6C65-A1Motorcraft® High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle
Brake Fluid (U.S.)
Motorcraft® High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle
Brake Fluid / Liquide de frein automobile DOT 3
haute performance Motorcraft® (Canada)
PM-1-C (U.S.)
CPM-1-C (Canada)
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
for vehicles with vacuum brake booster
systems. High Performance DOT 3 brake
fluid is also acceptable to use.
Note: Use of any fluid other than the
recommended fluid could cause reduced
brake performance and not meet our
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials could result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
227
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Hydroboost Brake System
Capacities
QuantityVariant
Fill as required.All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M6C65-A2Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid (U.S.)
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de frein automobile
haute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft® (Canada)
PM-20 (U.S. & Canada)
WSS-M6C65-A1Motorcraft® High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle
Brake Fluid (U.S.)
Motorcraft® High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle
Brake Fluid / Liquide de frein automobile DOT 3
haute performance Motorcraft® (Canada)
PM-1-C (U.S.)
CPM-1-C (Canada)
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
for vehicles with hydroboost brake booster
systems. High Performance DOT 3 brake
fluid is also acceptable to use.
Note: Use of any fluid other than the
recommended fluid could cause reduced
brake performance and not meet our
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials could result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Power Steering System
Capacities
QuantityVariant
Between MIN/MAX on power steering fluid
reservoir.
All.
228
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
MERCON® LV WSS-M2C938-AMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid (U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid / Huile pour boîte automatique MERCON® LV
Motorcraft® (Canada)
XT-10-QLVC (U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6 (Canada)
Door Weatherstrips
Materials
SpecificationName
ESR-M13P4-AMotorcraft® Silicone Spray Lubricant (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Silicone Lubricant / Lubrifiant à la
silicone Motorcraft® (Canada)
XL-6 (U.S.)
CXC-90-B (Canada)
Locks
Materials
SpecificationName
-Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Penetrating Fluid / Liquide dégrippant
Motorcraft® (Canada)
XL-1 (U.S.)
CXC-51-A (Canada)
Dana Limited Slip Axle M70FF (M267FF)
Capacities
QuantityVariant
3.28 qt (3.1 L)
1
E-350
1
Fill Dana rear axles to 0.24–0.55 in (6–14 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
229
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSL-M2C192-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant (U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant / Lubrifiant synthétique pour pont arrière
SAE 75W-140 Motorcraft® (Canada)
XY-75W140-QL (U.S.)
CXY-75W140-1L (Canada)
Dana Limited Slip Axle M70HD (M273HD)
Capacities
QuantityVariant
4.86 qt (4.6 L)
1
E-450
1
Fill Dana rear axles to 0.24–0.55 in (6–14 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSL-M2C192-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant (U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant / Lubrifiant synthétique pour pont arrière
SAE 75W-140 Motorcraft® (Canada)
XY-75W140-QL (U.S.)
CXY-75W140-1L (Canada)
Dana Conventional Axle M70FF (M267FF)
Capacities
QuantityVariant
3.28 qt (3.1 L)
1
E-350
1
Fill Dana rear axles to 0.24–0.55 in (6–14 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
230
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSP-M2C197-AMotorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle
Lubricant (U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Axle Lubricant
/ Lubrifiant pour essieux de très haute qualité SAE
80W-90 Motorcraft® (Canada)
XY-80W90-QL (U.S.)
CXY-80W90-1L (Canada)
Dana Conventional Axle M70HD (M273HD)
Capacities
QuantityVariant
4.86 qt (4.6 L)
1
E-450
1
Fill Dana rear axles to 0.24–0.55 in (6–14 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSP-M2C197-AMotorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle
Lubricant (U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Axle Lubricant
/ Lubrifiant pour essieux de très haute qualité SAE
80W-90 Motorcraft® (Canada)
XY-80W90-QL (U.S.)
CXY-80W90-1L (Canada)
Washer Reservoir
Capacities
QuantityVariant
Fill as required.All.
231
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concen-
trate with Bitterant (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid / Liquide lave-glace de haute qualité Motor-
craft® (Canada)
ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
CXC-37-A/B/D/F (Canada)
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for
North America and an “E” for Europe to
ensure lamp performance, light brightness
and pattern and safe visibility. The correct
bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and
will provide quality bulb illumination time.
Exterior Lamps
Trade NameLamp
W5WFront side marker lamp.
3157AKPark lamp.
3157AKFront direction indicator.
H13Headlamp low beam.
H13Headlamp high beam.
2825Front clearance lamp (exterior mirror).
3157KBrake, rear and direction indicator lamp.
3156Reversing lamps.
232
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Interior Lamps
Trade NameLamp
906Underhood Lamp.
578Map lamp.
578Dome lamp.
578Cargo lamp.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.
233
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CONNECTED VEHICLE
REQUIREMENTS
Connected service and related feature
functionality requires a compatible vehicle
network and the FordPass app.
Some remote features require a
subscription. For additional information,
see the FordPass app. Some restrictions,
third party terms and message or data
rates may apply.
CONNECTED VEHICLE
LIMITATIONS
Evolving technology or evolving cellular
networks could affect functionality and
availability, or continued provision of some
features. These changes could even stop
some features from functioning.
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO
A MOBILE NETWORK
What Is the Connectivity Device
E314755
The connectivity device enables
access to a range of features
built into your vehicle.
Disabling the Connectivity Device
To disable the connectivity device, contact
the Ford Customer Relationship Center.
Note: Disabling your connectivity device is
permanent.
Connecting FordPass to the
Connectivity Device
1. Open the FordPass app on your device
and log in.
2. Add your vehicle or select your vehicle
if already added.
3. Select the option for vehicle details.
4. Select the option to activate your
vehicle.
CONNECTED VEHICLE – TROUBLESHOOTING
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot confirm the
connection of my FordPass
account to the connectivity
device.
– Contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center to
check that the FordPass account is connected to the
device.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to a place where the
network signal is not obstructed.
234
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Connected Vehicle (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
Note: Listening to loud audio for long
periods of time could damage your hearing.
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
AUDIO UNIT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
E305609
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls may look different
from what you see here.
Note: Some features, such as satellite
radio, may not be available in your location.
Check with an authorized dealer.
235
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Audio System (If Equipped)
Accessing the Sound Settings
E280315
Press the button to adjust the
sound settings. You can also
activate and set the sensitivity
of the adaptive or speed compensated
volume.
Accessing the System Settings
Press the button.
Adjusting the Volume
E260697
Turn to adjust the volume.
Changing Radio Stations
E260687
A
B
Auto or Manual tuning.A
Station name tuning.B
Note: You can change between auto or
manual tuning with the rotary control using
the system settings.
Note: You can change radio stations using
the seek buttons.
Note: You can recall radio stations using
the numeric preset buttons.
Pausing or Playing Media
In media mode, press and
release the button to pause
playback. Press the button again
to resume playback.
In radio mode, press the button to mute
the signal. Press the button again to
restore the signal.
Returning to the Previous Screen
E281480
Press and release the button.
Scrolling Through the Menu
Options
E260782
Selecting Media
E100027
Press the button to select media
mode.
Repeatedly press the button, or
rotate the right-hand rotary control to
scroll through the available media sources.
236
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Audio System (If Equipped)
Selecting a Menu Option
E260781
Selecting the Radio
Press the button to select radio
mode.
Press the button again to display
the available radio sources. Repeatedly
press the button, or rotate the right-hand
rotary control to scroll through the
available radio sources.
Setting a Memory Preset
Tune to a station then press and hold one
of the numbered memory preset buttons.
The audio mutes briefly while the system
saves the station and returns once the
station is stored.
Switching the Audio Unit On and
Off
E260686
Press and release the button.
Using a Cell Phone
Press the button to either
answer an incoming phone call
or to make a phone call.
E265040
Press and hold the button to end
a phone call.
Using Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse
Press and release the button to
skip to the next track.
Press and hold the button to fast
forward through the track.
Press and release the button to
return to the beginning of a track.
Repeatedly press the button to
return to previous tracks.
Press and hold the button to rewind.
In radio mode, select a frequency band and
press and release either button. The
system stops at the first station it finds in
that direction.
237
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Audio System (If Equipped)
In satellite radio mode, press and release
to select the next or previous satellite radio
station. If you select a specific category,
such as jazz, rock or news, press to find the
next or previous station in the category you
select.
DIGITAL RADIO
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts, where
available, in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your
screen. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode, only, if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations, HD2 through HD7, are
only available digitally.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
• Memory presets allow you to save an
active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
238
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Audio System (If Equipped)
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
When the system first receives a station, aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations, it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for the accuracy of all audio
streams and data fields.
239
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Audio System (If Equipped)
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment
by the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat
in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The
reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or blending in
and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until
the audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting HD2 or
HD3, multicast preset or
Direct Tune.
No action required. The
station is not available in
your current location.
The previously stored
multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in your
current reception area.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3
multicast channel when
recalling a preset or from a
direct tune.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.
1
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Text information does not
match currently playing
audio.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.
1
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
There is no text information
shown for currently selected
frequency.
1
http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD
and HD Radio logos are proprietary
trademarks of DTS Ford Motor Company
and DTS are not responsible for the
content sent using HD Radio technology.
Content may be changed, added or deleted
at any time at the station owner's
discretion.
CONNECTING A BLUETOOTH
DEVICE
Pairing a Device
E142607
Press the button.
Select Bluetooth and follow the
instructions on the screen.
240
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Audio System (If Equipped)
Note: When pairing a new device, you can
choose to download contacts, set this as
the primary device and enable Emergency
Assistance.
SATELLITE RADIO
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio broadcasts a
variety of music, news, sports, weather,
traffic and entertainment satellite radio
channels. For more information and a
complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada,
or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna
clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
interference and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer-
ence
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
E208625
241
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Audio System (If Equipped)
SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term,
which begins on the date of sale or lease
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
for availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. When in
satellite radio mode, tune to channel 0.
Troubleshooting
ActionConditionMessage
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.
Acquiring…
If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an igni-
tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module
or system failure present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer
available.
Invalid Channel
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the
SiriusXM satellite or Siri-
usXM tower to your vehicle
antenna.
No Signal
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
Update of channel
programming in progress.
Updating…
242
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Audio System (If Equipped)
ActionConditionMessage
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Questions? Call
1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to
turn off the Lock or Skip
function on that station.
All the channels in the
selected category are either
skipped or locked.
None found
Check Channel Guide
No action required.SiriusXM has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
Subscription Updated
STREAMING BLUETOOTH
AUDIO
Selecting a Bluetooth Source
E100027
Press the button to display the
menu.
Repeatedly press the button to scroll to
the Bluetooth device.
Press the OK button.
Press the button to play the
track. Press the button again to
pause the track.
Press the button to skip to the
next track.
Press and hold the button to fast
forward through the track.
Press the button once to return
to the beginning of the track.
Repeatedly press the button to
return to previous tracks.
Press and hold the button to fast rewind.
Note: Not all functions are supported by all
phones.
PLAYING MEDIA FROM A USB
DEVICE
Supported Audio File Formats
You can play audio file formats including
MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and
FLAC.
Note: The NTFS file system is not
supported.
Selecting the USB Device
E100027
Press the button to display the
menu.
Repeatedly press the button to scroll to
your USB device.
Press the OK button.
Playing from the USB Device
Press the button to play a track.
Press the button again to pause
the track.
Press the button to skip to the
next track.
Press and hold the button to fast
forward through the track.
243
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Audio System (If Equipped)
Press the button once to return
to the beginning of a track.
Repeatedly press the button to
return to previous tracks.
Press and hold the button to fast rewind.
Sorting by Categories
You can also sort and play music by
specific categories, for example artist or
album.
Press the OK button to view the available
categories.
USB PORT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
E201595
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices.
Note: Not all USB ports in your vehicle have
data transfer capabilities. See Auxiliary
Power Points (page 76).
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
Phone Voice Service
This system allows you to use the voice
recognition features of your phone and
focus on your driving.
E142599
Press and hold the voice control
button on the audio unit.
Note: This only works when connected via
Bluetooth. See Connecting a Bluetooth
Device (page 240).
Note: When using voice recognition use the
language set on the device.
Note: We recommend that you check your
data plan before using your phone voice
service through the system. Using them
could result in additional charges.
244
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Audio System (If Equipped)
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your authorized dealer or visit the
online store web site:
Web Address (United States)
www.Accessories.Ford.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.Accessories.Ford.ca
We will repair or replace any properly
authorized dealer-installed Ford Original
Accessory found to be defective in
factory-supplied materials or workmanship
during the warranty period, as well as any
component damaged by the defective
accessories.
We will warrant your Ford Original
Accessory through the warranty that
provides the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details
and a copy of the warranty.
*Ford Licensed Accessories. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Ford Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Ford Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Ford dealer for the
manufacturer’s limited warranty details,
and request a copy of the Ford Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio
transmitters, for example two-way
radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
• An authorized dealer needs to install
mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
operation of your vehicle, particularly
if the manufacturer did not design the
mobile communication system
specifically for automotive use.
• If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability. In
addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
245
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Accessories
AUXILIARY SWITCHES (IF
EQUIPPED)
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
equipped with radio transmitters, for
example, two-way radios, telephones
and theft alarms. Any such equipment
installed in your vehicle should comply
with Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulations, and
should be installed by an authorized
dealer.
• An authorized dealer needs to install
mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
operation of your vehicle, particularly
if the manufacturer did not design the
mobile communication system
specifically for automotive use.
• If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability. In
addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
E163431
The auxiliary switch option package
provides four switches, mounted in the
center of the instrument panel. These
switches operate when the vehicle is
running or from battery power, depending
on the switchable PDB fuse locations #82
and #83. Ford recommends, however, that
the engine remain running to maintain
battery charge when using the auxiliary
switches for extended periods of time or
higher current draws.
When switched on, the auxiliary switches
provide 20 amps or 40 amps of electrical
battery power for a variety of personal or
commercial uses.
The switches include the fuse and relay kit.
This kit contains the required fuses and
relays that an authorized technician needs
to install into the power distribution box,
located under the hood. Refer to the
instruction sketch included in the kit.
Contact an authorized dealer for service.
Each switch includes a power lead (a
blunt-cut and sealed wire) located in the
underhood cowl shield above the engine
block powertrain control module.
The power leads are coded as follows:
246
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Accessories
Fuse
Amp
Rating
Wire
Color
Circuit
Number
Switch
40AYellowCAC05AUX 1
40AGreen
with
Brown
Trace
CAC06AUX 2
20AViolet
with
Green
Trace
CAC07AUX 3
20ABrownCAC08AUX 4
Learn more about auxiliary switches by
visiting
https://www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas/.
Upfitter Interface Module (If Equipped)
The Upfitter Interface Module (UIM) is an
electronic control module that operates
equipment (such as lift buckets, cranes,
motors, salt spreaders and snow plows)
with external relays.
If you replace the module, it will require
additional programming by the upfitter.
Obtain this data directly from the upfitter
company. The upfitter contact information
is in the vehicle door opening.
For more information on the Upfitter
Interface Module and the auxiliary
switches, contact your upfitter.
247
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Accessories
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD
PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
Ford Protect Extended Service
Plans (U.S. Only)
Ford Protect extended service plan means
peace of mind. It’s the extended service
plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and
provides more protection beyond the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When
you visit your Ford Dealer, Insist on Ford
Protect extended service plans!
Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One trip to the Service Center could easily
exceed the price of your Ford Protect
extended service plan. With Ford Protect
extended service plan you minimize your
risk for unexpected repair bills and rising
repair costs.
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components
There are four mechanical Ford Protect
extended service plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for
details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete it’s probably easier to
list what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Ford dealers in
the U.S., Canada and Mexico.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
If you bring your car into your dealer for
service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for
the day.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including warranty repairs, and
Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts.
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
• Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
coverage or other transportation.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Protect extended service plan coverage
expires, you can transfer any remaining
coverage to the new owner. Which should
give you and your potential buyer a little
more peace of mind.
248
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Ford Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your
Vehicle
Ford Protect extended service plan also
offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that
covers all scheduled maintenance, and
selected wear items. The coverage is
prepaid, so you never have to worry about
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance.
Covered maintenance includes:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc (if equipped).
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers.
• Struts.
• Engine Belts.
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if
equipped).
• Cabin air filter replacement every
20,000 mi (32,000 km) (electric
vehicles only).
Interest Free Finance Options
Just a 5% down payment will provide you
with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program allowing you all the
security and benefits Ford Protect
extended service plan has to offer while
paying over time. You are pre-approved
with no credit check or hassles. To learn
more, call our Ford Protect extended
service plan specialists at 800-367-3377.
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
Ford Protect Extended Service
Plan (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect
extended service plan. Ford Protect
extended service plan is the only service
contract backed by Ford Motor Company
of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan
you purchase, Ford Protect extended
service plan provides benefits such as:
• Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
• Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires.
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Ford Protect extended
service plans available in various time,
distance and deductible combinations.
Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing
and rental. When you purchase Ford
Protect extended service plan, you receive
added peace-of-mind protection
throughout Canada, the United States and
Mexico, provided by a network of
participating authorized Ford Motor
Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada
and the United States are not eligible for
Ford Protect extended service plan
coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information; visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Protect extended service plan that is
right for you.
249
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Ford Protect
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes;
one is to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost
of owning your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 219).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your
dealership about the training and
certification their technicians have
received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft
Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide
24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
parts and labor limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one
stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to collision
repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
250
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts
and component systems based upon
engineering testing. Ford Motor Company
relies upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford
Workshop Manual list the recommended
additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
We do not recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part of
your vehicle’ s normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert, such
as the factory-trained technicians at your
dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination
immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using a Ford-approved flushing
chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
251
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check every six months
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
Multi-point inspection
Horn operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hosesBattery performance
Suspension component for leaks or
damage
Engine air filter
Steering and linkageExhaust system
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper
pressure
**
Exterior lamps and hazard warning system
operation
Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
Fluid levels
*
; fill if necessary
Washer spray and wiper operationFor oil and fluid leaks
*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission, power steering and window
washer.
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
252
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
Note: Do not exceed the mileage or time intervals.
Maintenance
Rotate the tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth.
1
Every
7,500 mi
(12,000 km)
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear,
looseness or drag.
Perform a multi-point inspection.
Change the engine oil and filter.Every
10,000 mi
(16,000 km)
/12 months
or 450
engine
hours,
whichever
comes first
1
Rotate the front wheels on vehicles with dual rear wheels when specified. Only rotate
the rear wheels if you notice unusual wear.
Maintenance
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult dealer for require-
ments.
Every
15,000 mi
(24,000 km)
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft
and the U-joints.
253
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Brake Fluid Maintenance
1
Change the brake fluid.
2
Every 3 Years
1
Perform this maintenance item every 3 years. Do not exceed the designated time for
the interval.
2
Brake fluid servicing requires special equipment available at your authorized dealer.
Other Maintenance Items
Replace the engine air filter.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) Torque the rear axle U-bolts to specification.
Replace the front wheel bearing grease and grease seal, if
you use non-sealed bearings.
Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Replace the spark plugs.
Every 97,500 mi
(157,000 km)
Replace the rear axle fluid. See Special Operating Condi-
tions Scheduled Maintenance (page 255).
Inspect the accessory drive belts.
1
Every 105,000 mi
(168,000 km)
Change the automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150,000 mi
(240,000 km)
Change the automatic transmission filter.
Replace the accessory drive belts if not replaced within the
last 100,000 mi (160,000 km).
Replace the front wheel bearings and seals, if you use non-
sealed bearings.
Change the engine coolant.
2
Every 200,000 mi
(320,000 km)
1
If not replaced, inspect every 15,000 mi (24,000 km).
2
Initial replacement at ten years or 200,000 mi (320,000 km), then every five years or
100,000 mi (160,000 km).
254
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display and perform services listed in the
Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect the U-joints.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace the rear axle fluid. See axle maintenance items
under Exceptions.
Every 22,500 mi
(36,000 km)
Replace the spark plugs.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use
(Such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery)
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display and perform services listed in the
Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace the engine air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace the rear axle fluid. See axle maintenance items
under Exceptions.
Every 22,500 mi
(36,000 km)
Replace the spark plugs.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
255
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads)
Replace engine air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
Rotate the tires
1
, inspect tires for wear and measure the
tread depth.
Change the engine oil and filter.
2
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
Perform a multi-point inspection.
1
Vehicles with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels when specified; rear wheels
only if unusual wear is noted.
2
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change. See Oil
Change Indicator Reset (page 164).
Exclusive Use of E85 - Flex Fuel Vehicles Only
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank with regular
unleaded fuel.
Every oil change
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
Axle(s) and transfer case, four-wheel drive
vehicles, fluid changes or level checks are
not required unless a leak is suspected or
the assembly has been submerged in
water. Contact an authorized dealer for
service.
California fuel filter replacement: If you
register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. We however, urge you to have
all recommended maintenance services
performed at the specified intervals and
to record all vehicle service.
Hot climate oil change intervals:
Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
oil change interval is 5,000 mi (8,000 km).
256
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
3,000 mi (4,800 km).
Engine air filter replacement: The life of
the engine air filter is dependent on
exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions
require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
RECORD
After the scheduled maintenance services
are performed, record the Repair Order #,
Distance and Engine Hours in the boxes
provided.
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
257
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
258
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
259
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
260
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
261
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
262
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
263
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
264
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
265
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
266
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY
WARNING: Do not place objects
or mount equipment on or near the
airbag cover, on the side of the seatbacks
(of the front seats), or in front seat areas
that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not fasten antenna
cables to original vehicle wiring, fuel
pipes and brake pipes.
WARNING: Keep antenna and
power cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from
any electronic modules and airbags.
Note: We test and certify your vehicle to
meet electromagnetic compatibility
legislation (UNECE Regulation 10 or other
applicable local requirements). It is your
responsibility to make sure that any
equipment an authorized dealer installs on
your vehicle complies with applicable local
legislation and other requirements.
Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular
telephones and amateur radio transmitters)
must keep to the parameters in the
following table. We do not provide special
provisions or conditions for installations or
use.
Car
E239120
267
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
Van
E239122
Truck
E239121
268
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (Peak
RMS)
Frequency Band
MHz
1501-30
2, 35050-54
2, 35068-88
2, 350142-176
2, 350380-512
2, 310806-870
Note: After the installation of radio
frequency transmitters, check for
disturbances from and to all electrical
equipment in your vehicle, both in the
standby and transmit modes.
Check all electrical equipment:
• With the ignition ON.
• With the engine running.
• During a road test at various speeds.
Check that electromagnetic fields
generated inside your vehicle cabin by the
transmitter installed do not exceed
applicable human exposure requirements.
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
SYNC End User License Agreement
(EULA)
• You have acquired a device ("DEVICE")
that includes software licensed by Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY") from an
affiliate of Microsoft Corporation
("MS") . Those installed software
products of MS origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials,
and "online" or electronic
documentation ("MS SOFTWARE")
are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties.
The MS SOFTWARE is licensed, not
sold. All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY. The additional
software and systems of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials,
and "online" or electronic
documentation ("FORD SOFTWARE")
are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties.
The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not
sold. All rights reserved.
269
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
• The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD
SOFTWARE may interface with and/or
communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by third party
software and service suppliers. The
additional software and services of
third party origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation ("THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE, FORD
SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively
and individually will be referred to as
"SOFTWARE".
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL
CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO
THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY
PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICE and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, or disassemble nor permit
others to reverse engineer, decompile
or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation.
• Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation.
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICE and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
270
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICE, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or MS may terminate this EULA if you
fail to comply with the terms and
conditions of this EULA.
• Security Updates/Digital Rights
Management: Content owners use
the WMDRM technology included in
your DEVICE to protect their
intellectual property, included
copyrighted content. Portions of the
SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use
WMDRM software to access
WMDRM-protected content. If the
WMDRM software fails to protect the
content, content owners may ask
Microsoft to revoke the SOFTWARE's
ability to use WMDRM to play or copy
protected content. This action does
not affect unprotected content. When
your DEVICE downloads licenses for
protected content, you agree that
Microsoft may include a revocation list
with the licenses. Content owners may
require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE
on your DEVICE to access their content.
If you decline an upgrade, you will not
be able to access content that requires
the upgrade.
• Consent to Use of Data: You agree
that MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and systems suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may collect and use technical
information gathered in any manner as
part of product support services related
to the SOFTWARE or related services.
MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and services suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may use this information solely to
improve their products or to provide
customized services or technologies to
you. MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and systems suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may disclose this information to others,
but not in a form that personally
identifies you.
• Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, their affiliates and/or
their designated agent may
automatically check the version of the
SOFTWARE and/or its components
that you are utilizing and may provide
upgrades or supplements to the
SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICE.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
271
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components").
If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party
software and services suppliers provide or
make available to you Supplemental
Components and no other EULA terms are
provided along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this EULA
shall apply.
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent make
available Supplemental Components, and
no other EULA terms are provided, then
the terms of this EULA shall apply, except
that the MS, Microsoft Corporation or
affiliate entity providing the Supplemental
Component(s) shall be the licensor of the
Supplemental Component(s).
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to you or
made available to you through the use of
the SOFTWARE.
• Links to Third Party Sites: The MS
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites through
the use of the SOFTWARE. The third
party sites are not under the control of
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated
agent. Neither MS nor Microsoft
Corporation nor their affiliates nor their
designated agent are responsible for
(i) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated
agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICE operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and assumes any risk associated with
the use of the DEVICE.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CD
ROM disk(s) or via web download or other
means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
272
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or
their affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content. All rights not
specifically granted under this EULA are
reserved by MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service providers, their
affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments. For additional
information, see:
Website
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, third party software or service
providers, their affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support
for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS,
its parent corporation Microsoft
Corporation, or their affiliates or
subsidiaries. For product support, please
refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY
instructions provided in the documentation
for the DEVICE. Should you have any
questions concerning this EULA, or if you
desire to contact FORD MOTOR
COMPANY for any other reason, please
refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICE.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND
THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS,
MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR
THEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY
AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO
HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.
$250.00).
273
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
• THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER
THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY
BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
Adobe
Contains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or
[AIR®] technology by Adobe Systems
Incorporated. This [Licensee Product]
contains [Adobe® Flash® Player]
[Adobe® AIR®] software under license
from Adobe Systems Incorporated,
Copyright ©1995-2009 Adobe
Macromedia Software LLC. All rights
reserved. Adobe, Flash and AIR are
trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
End User Notice
Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for
Automotive Important Safety
Information
This system Ford SYNC contains software
that is licensed to Manufacturer FORD
MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of
Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a license
agreement. Any removal, reproduction,
reverse engineering or other unauthorized
use of the software from this system in
violation of the license agreement is strictly
prohibited and may subject you to legal
action.
Read and follow instructions: Before
using your Windows Automotive- based
system, read and follow all instructions
and safety information provided in this end
user manual ("User's Guide"). Not
following precautions found in this User's
Guide can lead to an accident or other
serious consequences.
Keep User's Guide in vehicle: When kept
in the vehicle, the User's Guide will be a
ready reference for you and other users
unfamiliar with the Windows
Automotive-based system. Please make
certain that before using the system for
the first time, all persons have access to
the User's Guide and read its instructions
and safety information carefully.
WARNING: Operating certain parts
of this system while driving can distract
your attention away from the road, and
possibly cause an accident or other
serious consequences. Do not change
system settings or enter data
non-verbally (using your hands) while
driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe and
legal manner before attempting these
operations. This is important since while
setting up or changing some functions
you might be required to distract your
attention away from the road and
remove your hands from the wheel.
General Operation
Voice Command Control: Functions
within the Windows Automotive-based
system may be accomplished using only
voice commands. Using voice commands
while driving allows you to operate the
system without removing your hands from
the wheel.
Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a prolonged
view of the screen while you are driving.
Pull over in a safe and legal manner before
attempting to access a function of the
system requiring prolonged attention. Even
occasional short scans to the screen may
be hazardous if your attention has been
diverted away from your driving task at a
critical time.
274
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level
where you can still hear outside traffic and
emergency signals while driving. Driving
while unable to hear these sounds could
cause an accident.
Use of Speech Recognition Functions:
Speech recognition software is inherently
a statistical process which is subject to
errors. It is your responsibility to monitor
any speech recognition functions included
in the system and address any errors.
Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully read
and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual (non-verbal)
setup. Attempting to perform such set-up
or insert data while driving can seriously
distract your attention and could cause an
accident or other serious consequences.
Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner
before attempting these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only as
an aid. Make your driving decisions based
on your observations of local conditions
and existing traffic regulations. Any such
feature is not a substitute for your personal
judgment. Any route suggestions made by
this system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be
placed in an unsafe situation, or if you
would be directed into an area that you
consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately
responsible for the safe operation of the
vehicle and therefore, must evaluate
whether it is safe to follow the suggested
directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used
by this system may be inaccurate because
of changes in roads, traffic controls or
driving conditions. Always use good
judgment and common sense when
following the suggested routes.
Emergency Services: Do not rely on any
navigation features included in the system
to route you to emergency services. Ask
local authorities or an emergency services
operator for these locations. Not all
emergency services such as police, fire
stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to
be contained in the map database for such
navigation features.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the Telenav
Software. Your use of the Telenav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the Telenav Software.
These terms and conditions represent the
agreement (“Agreement”) between you
and Telenav, Inc. (“Telenav”) with respect
to the Telenav Software (including
upgrades, modifications, or additions
thereto) (collectively “Telenav Software”).
All references herein to “you” and “your”
means you, your employees, agents, and
contractors, and any other entity on whose
behalf you accept these terms and
275
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
conditions, all of whom shall also be bound
by this Agreement. Additionally, all of your
account information, as well as other
payment and personal information
provided by you to Telenav (directly or
through the use of the Telenav Software,
is subject to Telenav’s privacy policy
located at http://www.telenav.com.
Telenav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the Telenav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the Telenav Software: (a) observe
all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the Telenav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c)
do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the Telenav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked; (d)
do not use the Telenav Software for any
illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
manner inconsistent with this Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
Telenav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold Telenav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the Telenav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the
Telenav Software, to provide Telenav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform Telenav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
Subject to your compliance with the terms
of this Agreement, Telenav hereby grants
to you a personal, non-exclusive,
non-transferable license (except as
expressly permitted below in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
Telenav Software license), without the
right to sublicense, to use the Telenav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the Telenav
Software. This license shall terminate upon
any termination or expiration of this
Agreement. You agree that you will use the
Telenav Software only for your personal
business or leisure purposes, and not to
provide commercial navigation services to
other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
You agree not to do any of the following:
(a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or
otherwise change the Telenav Software
or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive
the source code, audio library or structure
of the Telenav Software without the prior
express written consent of Telenav; (c)
remove from the Telenav Software, or
alter, any of Telenav’s or its suppliers’
trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or
276
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
copyright notices, or other notices or
markings; (d) distribute, sublicense or
otherwise transfer the Telenav Software
to others, except as part of your permanent
transfer of the Telenav Software; or (e)
use the Telenav Software in any manner
that (i) infringes the intellectual property
or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party, (ii)
violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or (iii) is harmful,
threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous,
defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or
otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent
out, or otherwise permit unauthorized
access by third parties to the Telenav
Software without advanced written
permission of Telenav.
4. Disclaimers
To the fullest extent permissible pursuant
to applicable law, in no event will Telenav,
its licensors and suppliers, or agents or
employees of any of the foregoing, be
liable for any decision made or action
taken by you or anyone else in reliance on
the information provided by the Telenav
Software. Telenav also does not warrant
the accuracy of the map or other data used
for the Telenav Software. Such data may
not always reflect reality due to, among
other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing
conditions. You are responsible for the
entire risk arising out of your use of the
Telenav Software. For example but
without limitation, you agree not to rely on
the Telenav Software for critical navigation
in areas where the well-being or survival
of you or others is dependent on the
accuracy of navigation, as the maps or
functionality of the Telenav Software are
not intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR
TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not
permit the disclaimer of certain warranties,
so this limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY
FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN
EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE
THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA,
LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS,
LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT
OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV’S
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR
277
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME
STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION
OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS
OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to this
Agreement or the Telenav Software shall
be settled by independent arbitration
involving a neutral arbitrator and
administered by the American Arbitration
Association in the County of Santa Clara,
California. The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and the
judgment upon the award rendered by the
arbitrator may be entered by any court
having jurisdiction. Note that there is no
judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding
and the decision of the arbitrator shall be
binding upon both parties. You expressly
agree to waive your right to a jury trial.
This Agreement and performance
hereunder will be governed by and
construed in accordance with the laws of
the State of California, without giving
effect to its conflict of laws provisions. To
the extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both Telenav and you agree to submit to
the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of
the County of Santa Clara, California. The
United Nations Convention on Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods shall
not apply.
7. Assignment
You may not resell, assign, or transfer this
Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
Telenav Software, and expressly
conditioned upon the new user of the
Telenav Software agreeing to be bound by
the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or
transfer that is not expressly permitted
under this paragraph will result in
immediate termination of this Agreement,
without liability to Telenav, in which case
you and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the Telenav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, Telenav
may assign this Agreement to any other
party at any time without notice, provided
the assignee remains bound by this
Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between Telenav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, Telenav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
Telenav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
Telenav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the Telenav Software, you
consent to receive from Telenav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
Telenav Software (collectively, “Notices”)
electronically. Telenav may provide such
278
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
Notices by posting them on Telenav’s
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the Telenav Software.
8.4
Telenav’s or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party’s right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words “include” and “including,” and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
“without limitation.”
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement includes
end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this
Agreement), and thus your use of the
Telenav Software is also subject to such
terms. You agree to comply with the
following additional terms and conditions,
which are applicable to Telenav’s third
party vendor licensors:
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from
the United States Postal Service® to
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4.
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
279
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including
their licensors and suppliers) on the other
hand.
© 20xx. All rights reserved.
Permitted Use.
You agree to use this Data together with
the Telenav Software solely for the internal
business and personal purposes for which
you were licensed, and not for service
bureau, time-sharing or other similar
purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the
restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,
disassemble, create any derivative works
of, or reverse engineer any portion of this
Data, and may not transfer or distribute it
in any form, for any purpose, except to the
extent permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions.
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by Telenav, and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not use this Data (a) with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs.
Warning.
The Data may contain inaccurate or
incomplete information due to the passage
of time, changing circumstances, sources
used and the nature of collecting
comprehensive geographic data, any of
which may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty.
This Data is provided to you “as is,” and
you agree to use it at your own risk. Telenav
and its licensors (and their licensors and
suppliers) make no guarantees,
representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, arising by law or
otherwise, including but not limited to,
content, quality, accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or
results to be obtained from this Data, or
that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty:
TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS
(INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND
SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.
280
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
Disclaimer of Liability:
TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS
(INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND
SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF
THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING
ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT
OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM
THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN
THE INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF
THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT
OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY,
EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS
HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control.
You shall not export from anywhere any
part of the Data or any direct product
thereof except in compliance with, and
with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations, including but not limited to the
laws, rules and regulations administered
by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of
the U.S. Department of Commerce and the
Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S.
Department of Commerce. To the extent
that any such export laws, rules or
regulations prohibit HERE from complying
with any of its obligations hereunder to
deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall
be excused and shall not constitute a
breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement.
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between Telenav (and
its licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the State of Illinois
[insert “Netherlands” where European
HERE Data is used], without giving effect
to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii)
the United Nations Convention for
Contracts for the International Sale of
Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You
agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the
State of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used] for
any and all disputes, claims and actions
arising from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder.
Government End Users.
If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf
of the United States government or any
other entity seeking or applying rights
similar to those customarily claimed by the
United States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with these End-User Terms,
and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
281
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
these End-User Terms under which this
Data was provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing
Data for the United States shall contain
the following notices:
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
information.”
“©United States Postal Service®
20XX. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United
States Postal Service®. The following
trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
B. Canada Data. The following provi-
sions apply to the Data for Canada,
which may include or reflect data from
third party licensors (“Third Party
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada
Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representa-
tions or warranties respecting such
data, either express or implied,
arising by law or otherwise, including
but not limited to, effectiveness,
completeness, accuracy or fitness
for a particular purpose.
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of
any claim, demand or action, irre-
spective of the nature of the cause
of the claim, demand or action
alleging any loss, injury or damages,
direct or indirect, which may result
from the use or possession of such
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the
Data.
282
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage
media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
for the copy; or (iii) other materials
packaged with the copy, such as user
manuals or end user license agree-
ments: “This data includes information
taken with permission from Canadian
authorities, including © Her Majesty
the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”
3. End-User Terms: Except as other-
wise agreed by the parties, in connec-
tion with the provision of any portion
of the Data for the Territory of Canada
to End-Users as may be authorized
under the Agreement, Client shall
provide such End-Users, in a reason-
ably conspicuous manner, with terms
(set forth with other end user terms
required to be provided under the
Agreement, or as otherwise may be
provided, by Client) which shall include
the following provisions on behalf of
the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan:
The Data may include or reflect
data of licensors, including Her
Majesty the Queen in the Right of
Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
and the Department of Natural
Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, complete-
ness, accuracy or fitness for a
particular purpose. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in
respect of any claim, demand or
action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or posses-
sion of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not
be liable in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the data
or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
and their officers, employees and
agents from and against any claim,
demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action, alleging loss,
costs, expenses, damages or injuries
(including injuries resulting in death)
arising out of the use or possession
of the data or the Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addi-
tion to all of the rights and obligations
of the parties under the Agreement.
To the extent that any of the provi-
sions of this Section are inconsistent
with, or conflict with, any other provi-
sions of the Agreement, the provisions
of this Section shall prevail.
283
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional
de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice:
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeTerritory
“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM-
2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
ENERO DE 2011”
Ecuador
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
Guade-
loupe,
French
Guiana
and
Marti-
nique
Mexico
IV. Middle East Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry
“© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The
foregoing notice require-
ment for Jordan Data is a
material term of the Agree-
ment. If Client or any of its
Jordan
permitted sublicensees (if
any) fail to meet such
requirement, HERE shall
have the right to terminate
Client’ s license with respect
to the Jordan Data.
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter-
prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
censees (if any) and End-Users are
restricted from using the Jordan Data in
Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
Jordan-based customer. For purposes
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica-
tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic-
ations, GIS applications, mobile business
asset management applications, call
center applications, telematics applica-
tions, public organization Internet
applications or for providing geocoding
services.
284
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
and agrees that in certain countries of
the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
party RDS-TMC code providers to
receive and use the Traffic Codes in
the Data and to deliver to End-Users
Transactions in any way derived from
or based on such Traffic Codes. For
such countries, HERE shall deliver the
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
Client only after receiving certification
from Client of its having obtained such
rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
each Transaction that uses Traffic
Codes for Belgium, provide the
following notice to the End-User:
“Traffic Codes for Belgium are
provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
license granted to Client relating to
making, selling or distributing paper
maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
paper-like medium): (a) such license
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
entering into and complying with a
separate written agreement with the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
OS any and all applicable paper map
royalties, and Client’s complying with
the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
is conditioned on Client’ s obtaining prior
written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
Client is restricted from using Data for
the Territory of France to create paper
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted
from using any Data to create, sell or
distribute paper maps that are the same
or substantially similar, in terms of data
content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
swesen of Austria, and the National
Land Survey of Sweden.
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring
a direct action against Client to enforce
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper
map requirements (see Section IV(B)
above) contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all
copies of the Data and/or packaging
relating thereto shall include the
respective Third Party Notices set forth
below and used as described below
corresponding to the Territory (or
portion thereof) included in such copy:
NoticeCountry(ies)
285
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
“© Bundesamt für Eich-
und Vermessungswesen”
Austria
“© EuroGeographics”
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine
“source: © IGN 2009 – BD
TOPO ®”
France
“Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung
der zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”
Germany
“Contains Ordnance
Survey data © Crown
copyright and database
right 2010 Contains Royal
Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database
right 2010”
Great
Britain
“Copyright Geomatics
Ltd.”
Greece
“Copyright © 2003; Top-
Map Ltd.”
Hungary
“La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando
quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed al
tratto prodotta e fornita
dalla Regione Toscana.”
Italy
“Copyright © 2000;
Norwegian Mapping
Authority”
Norway
“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”Portugal
“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”
Spain
“Based upon electronic
data © National Land
Survey Sweden.”
Sweden
“Topografische
Grundlage: © Bundesamt
für Landestopographie.
Switzerland
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not
received approvals to distribute map
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
HERE may update such list from time to
time. The license rights granted to Client
under this TL with respect to the Data
for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations, including, without
limitation, any required licenses or
approvals to distribute the Application
incorporating such Data in such
respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).
286
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
shall contain the following notice:
“Product incorporates traffic location
codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-
tion Limited and its licensors.”
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
as necessary for your personal use to (i)
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease
using this Data if you fail to comply with
these terms and conditions.
Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
described in applicable written materials
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s
support engineers will make commercially
reasonable efforts to solve any problem
issues.
rigCustomer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
be warranted for the remainder of the
original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
nor any product support services offered
by NAV2 are available without proof of
purchase from an authorized international
source.
287
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any
direct product thereof except in
compliance with, and with all licenses and
approvals required under, applicable
export laws, rules and regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its
suppliers and are protected by applicable
copyright and other intellectual property
law and treaties. The Data are provided
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale.
Entire Agreement
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
United Nations Convention for Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods, which
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder shall be
submitted to the Shanghai International
Economic and Trade Arbitration
Commission for arbitration.
288
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000-2007
Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright
© 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and
service may practice one or more of the
following U.S. Patents #5,987,525,
#6,061,680, #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6.240,459,
#6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device.
This device may contain content belonging
to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote.
You agree that you will use the content
from Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") ,
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers for your own
personal, non-commercial use only. You
agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote
Data (except in a Tag associated with a
music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE
NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE
CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote,
respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content,
including all ownership rights. Under no
circumstances will either Gracenote
become liable for any payment to you for
any information that you provide, including
any copyrighted material or music file
information. You agree that Gracenote
may enforce its respective rights,
collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
289
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER.
© Gracenote 2007.
Vehicle with SYNC only
United States and Mexico
FCC ID: KMHSG1G1
IC: 1422A-SG1G1
Mexico
Model: KMHSG1P1
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
The operation of this equipment is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
equipment or device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this
equipment or device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Vehicle with SYNC with
Touchscreen/My Touch
FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2
IC: 1422A-SYNCG2
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
290
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Appendices
A
A/C
See: Climate Control...........................................70
About This Manual...........................................5
ABS
See: Brakes.............................................................97
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes..................................................................97
Accessories....................................................245
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation............................................12
ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control............104
Adjusting the Headlamps..........................175
Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure............175
Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................47
Airbag Disposal...............................................38
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control...........................................70
Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter..............178
Appendices....................................................267
At a Glance........................................................16
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............62
Headlamps On Warning Chime......................62
Key in Ignition Warning Chime........................62
Parking Brake On Warning Chime..................62
Audio System................................................235
General Information.........................................235
Audio Unit.......................................................235
Accessing the Sound Settings......................236
Accessing the System Settings....................236
Adjusting the Volume.......................................236
Changing Radio Stations................................236
Pausing or Playing Media...............................236
Returning to the Previous Screen................236
Scrolling Through the Menu Options.........236
Selecting a Menu Option.................................237
Selecting Media..................................................236
Selecting the Radio...........................................237
Setting a Memory Preset.................................237
Switching the Audio Unit On and Off.........237
Using a Cell Phone.............................................237
Using Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse..............................................................237
Autolamps.........................................................51
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps.........................................................51
Automatic High Beam Control..................53
Automatic High Beam Control
Indicators........................................................53
Automatic Transmission.............................92
Brake-Shift Interlock..........................................94
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or
Snow....................................................................95
Progressive Range Selection - PRS..............94
Putting your vehicle in or out of gear:...........92
Understanding Your SelectShift
Automatic™ Transmission..........................93
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check.............................................................169
Automatic Transmission Fluid Filter.............171
Checking Automatic Transmission
Fluid....................................................................169
Auxiliary Power Points..................................76
110 Volt AC Power Point.....................................76
12 Volt DC Power Point.......................................76
Locations.................................................................76
Auxiliary Switches.......................................246
Upfitter Interface Module................................247
B
Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery.......................173
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............161
Booster Seats..................................................23
Types of Booster Seats......................................23
Brake Fluid Check...........................................171
Brake Fluid Service Interval.............................172
Brakes.................................................................97
General Information............................................97
Breaking-In......................................................137
Bulb Specification Chart...........................232
C
Canceling the Set Speed...........................103
Capacities and Specifications................223
Air Conditioning System..................................223
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................226
291
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Index
Automatic Transmission.................................223
Dana Conventional Axle M70FF
(M267FF).........................................................230
Dana Conventional Axle M70HD
(M273HD).........................................................231
Dana Limited Slip Axle M70FF
(M267FF).........................................................229
Dana Limited Slip Axle M70HD
(M273HD)........................................................230
Door Weatherstrips...........................................229
Engine Coolant...................................................224
Engine Oil..............................................................225
Fuel Tank...............................................................226
Grease....................................................................226
Hydroboost Brake System.............................228
Locks.......................................................................229
Power Steering System...................................228
Vacuum Brake System.....................................227
Washer Reservoir................................................231
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................180
Catalytic Converter.......................................89
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II).....................90
Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) Testing....................................................90
Changing a Bulb.............................................177
Lamp Assembly Condensation......................177
Replacing Brake/Tail/Turn/Reverse Lamp
Bulbs (Cut-Away Only)...............................178
Replacing Front Parking Lamp and Direction
Indicator Bulbs................................................178
Replacing Headlamp Bulbs.............................177
Replacing Side Marker Bulbs..........................178
Changing a Fuse...........................................159
Fuses.......................................................................159
Changing a Road Wheel.............................213
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information......................................................214
Tire Change Procedure.....................................215
Changing the 12V Battery...........................173
Dual Batteries.......................................................174
Reconnecting the Battery................................174
Changing the Engine Air Filter..................178
Changing the Wiper Blades......................175
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................174
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance..................................................31
Child Restraint Positioning.........................25
Child Safety........................................................17
General Information.............................................17
Cleaning Leather Seats..............................184
Cleaning Products.......................................180
Materials................................................................180
Cleaning the Engine.....................................182
Cleaning the Exterior..................................180
Cleaning the Headlamps..................................181
Exterior Chrome Parts.......................................181
Exterior Plastic Parts..........................................181
Stripes or Graphics..............................................181
Underbody.............................................................181
Under Hood...........................................................181
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.........................183
Cleaning the Interior....................................183
Mirrors.....................................................................183
Cleaning the Wheels...................................185
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades............................................................182
Climate Control...............................................70
Connected Vehicle......................................234
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network............................................................234
Connected Vehicle Limitations..............234
Connected Vehicle Requirements.........234
Connected Vehicle –
Troubleshooting........................................234
Connecting a Bluetooth Device.............240
Pairing a Device..................................................240
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network........................................................234
Connecting FordPass to the Connectivity
Device................................................................234
Disabling the Connectivity Device...............234
What Is the Connectivity Device..................234
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check............................165
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator........37
Cruise Control................................................103
Cruise Control Indicators...........................104
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Cruise Control...............................................47
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Cruise
Control............................................................48
Customer Assistance..................................145
292
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Index
D
Data Recording..................................................7
Comfort, Convenience and Entertainment
Data........................................................................9
Event Data.................................................................9
Service Data.............................................................8
Services That Third Parties Provide...............10
Services That We Provide..................................10
Vehicles With a Connectivity Device.............10
Vehicles With an Emergency Call
System...................................................................11
Vehicles With SYNC..............................................11
Daytime Running Lamps..............................51
Digital Radio..................................................238
HD Radio Reception and Station
Troubleshooting............................................239
Direction Indicators........................................52
Doors and Locks.............................................42
Driver Alert.........................................................111
Using Driver Alert..................................................111
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................33
Children and Airbags...........................................37
Passenger Airbag On and Off Switch ..........33
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment........................................................37
Driving Aids.......................................................111
Driving Hints....................................................137
Driving Through Water................................138
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps..........................51
E
Economical Driving.......................................137
Electromagnetic Compatibility...............267
Emission Law..................................................88
Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Tampering Acts and Maintenance...........89
Tampering With a Noise Control
System................................................................88
End User License Agreement.................269
SYNC End User License Agreement
(EULA)..............................................................269
Engine Block Heater.....................................80
Using the Engine Block Heater.......................80
Engine Coolant Check................................165
Adding Coolant...................................................165
Coolant Change...................................................167
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management..................................................168
Fail-Safe Cooling.................................................167
Recycled Coolant................................................167
Severe Climates...................................................167
Engine Emission Control.............................88
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................45
Engine Oil Check...........................................163
Adding Engine Oil...............................................163
Engine Oil Dipstick.......................................163
Engine Specifications.................................219
Drivebelt Routing................................................219
Environment......................................................15
Essential Towing Checks...........................130
Before Towing a Trailer.....................................134
Hitches.....................................................................131
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC).........................................135
Safety Chains........................................................131
Trailer Brakes.........................................................131
Trailer Lamps........................................................134
Trailer Towing Connector................................130
When Towing a Trailer......................................135
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording...............................................7
Exterior Mirrors................................................55
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................55
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................55
Telescoping Mirrors ............................................56
F
Fastening the Seatbelts..............................28
Seatbelt Locking Modes....................................29
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy................28
Flat Tire
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................213
Floor Mats.......................................................138
Ford Credit.........................................................12
US Only......................................................................12
Ford Protect...................................................248
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
(CANADA ONLY)..........................................249
Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S.
Only)..................................................................248
Fuel and Refueling.........................................82
293
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Index
Fuel Consumption.........................................86
Advertised Capacity...........................................86
Fuel Economy.......................................................86
Fuel Filter..........................................................173
Fuel Quality - E85..........................................82
Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel
Vehicles...............................................................82
Switching Between E85 and Gasoline.........83
Fuel Quality - Gasoline................................84
Choosing the Right Fuel....................................84
Fuel Shutoff.....................................................141
Fuses..................................................................151
Fuse Specification Chart............................151
Engine Compartment Fuse Box.....................151
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box............156
G
Gauges................................................................57
2.3 Inch Display......................................................57
8 Inch Display........................................................58
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge............59
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge...............................59
Fuel Gauge..............................................................59
Transmission Fluid Temperature
Gauge..................................................................59
Gearbox
See: Transmission................................................92
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................39
General Maintenance Information.......250
Multi-point Inspection......................................252
Owner Checks and Services...........................251
Protecting Your Investment...........................250
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................250
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?.....................................................250
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada..........................................................148
Getting the Services You Need................145
Away From Home...............................................145
H
Handbrake
See: Parking Brake...............................................98
Hazard Flashers..............................................141
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps......................175
Headlamp Removal
See: Removing a Headlamp...........................176
Headrest
See: Head Restraints...........................................73
Head Restraints...............................................73
Heating
See: Climate Control...........................................70
Hill Start Assist...............................................98
Switching the System On and Off.................99
Using Hill Start Assist.........................................99
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate.............................................................71
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather...............................................................72
General Hints...........................................................71
Quickly Cooling the Interior...............................72
Quickly Heating the Interior...............................71
Recommended Settings for Cooling.............72
Recommended Settings for Heating.............71
Vehicle Stationary for Extended Periods
During Extreme High Ambient
Temperatures....................................................72
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes..............................................................97
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............161
Horn....................................................................48
I
Ignition Switch.................................................78
In California (U.S. Only).............................146
Information Display Control......................48
Information Displays.....................................63
General Information............................................63
Information Messages.................................66
AdvanceTrac and Traction Control...............66
Battery and Charging System..........................67
Doors and Locks...................................................67
Engine.......................................................................67
Fuel............................................................................68
Maintenance..........................................................68
Power Steering.....................................................69
Transmission.........................................................69
Installing Child Restraints............................19
Child Seats...............................................................19
294
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Index
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts..........................19
Using Tether Straps..............................................21
Instrument Cluster.........................................57
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................51
Instrument Panel............................................16
Interior Mirror...................................................56
Automatic Dimming Mirror...............................56
Manual Dimming Mirror.....................................56
Introduction........................................................5
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................142
Connecting the Jumper Cables.....................142
Jump Starting.......................................................142
Preparing Your Vehicle......................................142
Removing the Jumper Cables........................143
K
Keys and Remote Controls.........................39
L
Lane Keeping System...................................112
Switching the System On and Off.................113
System Display.....................................................113
System Settings...................................................113
Troubleshooting...................................................114
Lighting Control..............................................50
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam...............51
Headlamp High Beam.......................................50
Lighting..............................................................50
General Information...........................................50
Limited Slip Differential..............................96
Load Carrying.................................................120
Load Limit.......................................................120
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles.............................................................124
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer..................................................................120
Locking and Unlocking.................................42
Autolock Feature..................................................43
Autounlock Feature.............................................43
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and
Autounlock.........................................................43
Illuminated Entry..................................................43
Power Door Locks................................................42
Remote Control.....................................................42
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................213
M
Maintenance...................................................161
General Information...........................................161
Manual Climate Control..............................70
Heater Only System............................................70
Manual Climate Control....................................70
Manual Seats...................................................74
Manual Lumbar ....................................................74
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward...............................................................74
Recline Adjustment.............................................74
Message Center
See: Information Displays.................................63
Mirrors
See: Windows and Mirrors................................55
Mobile Communications Equipment......14
Motorcraft Parts............................................219
N
Normal Scheduled Maintenance...........253
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset.......................164
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check.......................................163
Opening and Closing the Hood................161
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature......................................................149
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual..........149
Overriding Automatic High Beam
Control............................................................54
P
Parking Aids.....................................................101
Parking Brake..................................................98
Passive Anti-Theft System.........................45
SecuriLock®...........................................................45
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................45
295
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Index
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Playing Media From a USB Device........243
Selecting the USB Device...............................243
Supported Audio File Formats......................243
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................42
Power Seats......................................................75
Recline Adjustment.............................................75
Power Steering Fluid Check......................172
Power Windows..............................................55
Accessory Delay....................................................55
One-Touch Down.................................................55
Pre-Collision Assist.......................................116
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings...............................................................117
Blocked Sensors..................................................118
Distance Indication and Alert..........................117
Using the Pre-Collision Assist System........116
Protecting the Environment........................15
Puncture
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................213
R
Rear Axle...........................................................96
Rear Passenger Climate Controls.............72
Setting the Blower Motor Speed....................72
Switching the Rear Climate Control On and
Off..........................................................................72
Rear View Camera........................................101
Using the Rear View Camera System..........101
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera....................................101
Recommended Towing Weights............126
Calculating the Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight for Your Vehicle...............................129
Reduced Engine Performance.................137
Refueling...........................................................85
Fuel Filler Cap.......................................................86
Remote Control..............................................39
Car Finder.................................................................41
Changing the Remote Control Battery........40
Reprogramming the Remote Control..........40
Sounding the Panic Alarm.................................41
Removing a Headlamp...............................176
Repairing Minor Paint Damage...............185
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................12
Collision Repairs....................................................12
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs..................................................................12
Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control..............................................................41
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................150
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)...............................................................149
Resuming the Set Speed..........................104
Roadside Assistance..................................140
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance.........................................................141
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance....................................140
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance....................................140
Roadside Emergencies..............................140
Running-In
See: Breaking-In...................................................137
Running Out of Fuel......................................84
Filling a Portable Fuel Container....................85
S
Safety Precautions........................................82
Satellite Radio...............................................241
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN).................................................................242
Satellite Radio Reception Factors................241
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service...................241
Troubleshooting.................................................242
Scheduled Maintenance Record............257
Scheduled Maintenance..........................250
Seatbelt Extensions.......................................31
Seatbelt Height Adjustment.....................30
Seatbelts............................................................27
Principle of Operation.........................................27
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................30
Conditions of operation.....................................30
Seats....................................................................73
Security..............................................................45
Setting the Cruise Control Speed..........103
Changing the Set Speed..................................103
296
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Index
Sitting in the Correct Position....................73
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains.................................207
Spare Wheel
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................213
Special Notices................................................12
Fleet Telematics Modem....................................13
FordPass Connect.................................................13
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12
Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks and
Utility Type Vehicles........................................13
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector............................................................13
Special Instructions..............................................12
Using your Vehicle as an Ambulance............14
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance...............................................255
Exceptions............................................................256
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control............................................103
Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch.............................................78
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................78
Failure to Start.......................................................79
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes..................79
Important Ventilating Information.................79
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving.................................................................79
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary...........................................................79
Starting and Stopping the Engine...........78
General Information............................................78
Steering.............................................................115
Hydraulic Power Steering.................................115
Steering Wheel................................................47
Streaming Bluetooth Audio.....................243
Selecting a Bluetooth Source.......................243
Sun Visors.........................................................56
Illuminated Vanity Mirror...................................56
Supplementary Restraints System.........32
Principle of Operation.........................................32
Switching Automatic High Beam Control
On and Off.....................................................53
Activating the Automatic High Beam
Control.................................................................53
Switching Cruise Control On and
Off...................................................................103
Switching Cruise Control Off.........................103
Switching Cruise Control On..........................103
Symbols Glossary.............................................5
T
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications.............219
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)........................147
Tire Care...........................................................189
Glossary of Tire Terminology..........................191
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading..............................................................189
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall.............................................................192
Temperature A B C............................................190
Traction AA A B C...............................................190
Treadwear.............................................................190
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........208
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.......................................209
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System ......................................209
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires......................................188
Towing a Trailer..............................................125
Load Placement..................................................125
Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels...........................................................136
Emergency Towing.............................................136
Recreational Towing..........................................136
Towing...............................................................125
Traction Control............................................100
Principle of Operation......................................100
Transmission Code Designation.............222
Transmission....................................................92
Transporting the Vehicle............................143
U
Under Hood Overview................................162
USB Port.........................................................244
Using Adaptive Cruise Control................104
Automatic Cancellation...................................107
Blocked Sensor...................................................109
Canceling the Set Speed.................................107
Changing the Set Speed..................................107
Detection Issues.................................................108
297
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Index
Following a Vehicle............................................105
Hilly Condition and Trailer Tow
Usage..................................................................107
Overriding the Set Speed................................107
Resuming the Set Speed.................................107
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed.............105
Setting the Gap Distance................................106
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off.......................................................................108
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On........................................................................105
Switching to Normal Cruise Control............110
System Not Available.......................................109
Using Snow Chains.....................................207
Using Traction Control...............................100
Switching the System Off ..............................100
System Indicator Lights and
Messages.........................................................100
Using Voice Recognition...........................244
Phone Voice Service.........................................244
V
Vehicle Care...................................................180
General Information..........................................180
Vehicle Identification Number.................221
Vehicle Storage.............................................185
Body........................................................................185
Brakes.....................................................................186
Cooling system....................................................186
Disconnecting Your 12 Volt Battery..............186
Engine.....................................................................186
Fuel system..........................................................186
General...................................................................185
Miscellaneous......................................................186
Removing Vehicle From Storage..................186
Tires.........................................................................186
Ventilation
See: Climate Control...........................................70
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number.............221
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators................60
Airbag Warning Lamp........................................60
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Lamp...................................................................60
Battery.....................................................................60
Brake System Warning Lamp.........................60
Cruise Control Indicator....................................60
Direction Indicator...............................................60
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Lamp.....................................................................61
Engine Oil.................................................................61
Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp.......................61
Headlamp High Beam Indicator......................61
Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp.........................61
Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp...................61
Powertrain Malfunction/Electronic Throttle
Control..................................................................61
Service Engine Soon............................................61
Tow Haul Indicator...............................................62
Traction Control Indicator.................................62
Traction Control System Off............................62
Washer Fluid Check......................................173
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................180
See: Wipers and Washers.................................49
Waxing..............................................................182
What Is Automatic High Beam
Control.............................................................53
What Is Cruise Control...............................103
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................213
Wheels and Tires..........................................188
General Information..........................................188
Technical Specifications...................................217
Windows and Mirrors....................................55
Windshield Washers.....................................49
Windshield Wipers........................................49
Speed Dependent Wipers................................49
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades...................174
Wipers and Washers.....................................49
298
E-Series (TE4) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201910, First-Printing
Index
